Latest revision as of 03:49, 15 October 2024

People and Culture Dashboard Option

To Navigate to this Dashboard and the Widgets (and access People & Culture Manager functionality) follow these steps:

Click on Dashboard ---> Home (In the menu on the left-hand side of the system/screen).
Click on the "Dashboards Menu" Dropdown (the second dropdown menu from the top of the system/screen).
Scroll down and select "People & Culture."
When the People & Culture Dashboard opens, scroll down to the Widget you need in order to manage the entire Employee Management process.

This Dashboard contains the following Widgets:
1. 4 Small Information Display Widgets:

Active employees.
Leavers.
Total absence hours.
New starters.

2. Personal Details (Access to All Business).
3. Time Off and Pay (Access to All Business).
4. Tasks and Notifications (Access to All Business).
5. Company Policies (Access to All Business).
6. Performance Management (Access to All Business).
7. Announcements & Acknowledgements (Access to All Business).
8. Timesheets Management (Access to All Business).
9. Time Off Management (Access to All Business).
10. HR Surveys (Access to All Business).
11. WHS Incident (Access to All Business).
12. Compliance Management (Access to All Business).
13. HR Questions (Access to All Business).
14. Training (Access to All Business).

These widgets can be moved around in the Dashboard. They can also be removed from the Dashboard. This can be done in Maintenance --> Groups --> Permissions --> Select a Group and Go to Widgets.

Note: Notifications about Core-HR and Performance Management related Tasks and Reminders can be accessed via two locations:

System Inbox: click on the small envelope in the top right corner of the System - just to the left of your name (after you click on it a menu opens - scroll down and select 'See all Alerts' - which will open the inbox).
The Tasks & Notifications Widget on the People & Culture Dashboard.

People and Culture Widget - Search Team Member Personal Details

The following information is displayed in the "Personal Details" Widget:

1. Employee photo.
NOTE: Photos/impages can be saved in different locations - on the User record and/or on the Employee record. The System displays the photo based on the following logic:

If there is a photo saved on the User record this will be displayed.
If there is no photo saved on the User record, the photo saved on the Employee record will be displayed.
If there is no photo on either the User or the Employee record, then the photo will be blank/empty.

2. Name.
3. Email address.
4. Phone Number. With Country prefix. E.g. +61...
5. View Team.
6. Change Password.
7. Change Work Email.
8. Change Phone Number.
9. View Internal Vacancies.
10. Job Description.
NOTES:

To display the Job Description -and it will be displayed in a popup/lightbox. This assumes that a Job Description has been created for the Job that the Employee holds.
- If the Job Description has been added to the 'Notes' field on the Job Description record, then this will appear under the 'General' Tab in the pop up (if there's no Job Description added to the 'Notes' field then the 'General' Tab won't appear).
- If the Job Description has been attached as a .PDF on the Job Description record, then this will appear under the 'PDF' Tab in the pop up (if there's no PDF/file attached to the Job Description then the 'PDF' Tab won't appear).
- If the Job Description has been added to the 'Notes' field and also attached as a .PDF on the Job Description record, then both Tabs will appear.
- If the Employee has more than two Jobs, then the main/primary Job will appear at the top/first (listed as the 'Primary' Job) and any additional/subsequent Job/s will appear underneath (listed as 'Current' Job/s).

11. Job Name.
11. Department.
12. Location.
13. Salary.
14. Manager.

People and Culture Widget - Time Off and Pay

The following information is displayed in the "Time off and Pay" Widget:

1. Annual leave. This information is linked to Employment Country which is assigned to an Employee in the New Employee Wizard or against their Employee Masterfile Record. If this is selected as New Zealand, Leave Information will be displayed differently. Based on Entitled and Number of Hours Accrued for New Zealand. Available and Taken for Australia.
2. Personal leave. If Employment Country is New Zealand, this will be labelled Sick Leave.
3. Time in Lieu.
4. Timesheets.
5. Away Today.
6. Next Holidays.
7. Start Date.
8. Forecast.
9. Long Service Leave.
10. Accrual Rate.
11. Last Personal Leave Length.
12. Last Annual Leave Length.

NOTES:

Hours Taken This Year equals calendar year.
Hours Taken This Year will only display hours related to Leave/Time Off requested directly in Subscribe-HR. If the Employee requests Leave/Time Off outside of Subscribe-HR (e.g. via T&A), that Leave/those hours will not be displayed here.
'Last Personal/Annual Leave' displays are also linked/related to Leave/Time Off requests made directly in Subscribe-HR.

People and Culture - Tasks and Notifications Widget

The Tasks and Notifications Widget for People and Culture allows the People and Culture user to have access to "Team Dashboards" to receive, send and interact with "Quick Tasks" and automatically triggered workflows based on all people. These Task and Notification items are also delivered into the System "Inbox." "Quick Tasks" can be sent from the Quick Tasks Wizard, or from the "Tasks and Notifications" Widget itself. If a Manager has Delegated their Tasks and Notifications to System Administration Users/People & Culture Users , People & Culture Users will see those Tasks and Notifications in this Widget.

Because the number of notifications can be quite high (especially for Managers and System Administrators/People & Culture Users), notifications emails (that go to the User's personal email inbox) have to be manually activated via System settings. However, all notifications (for Tasks and Reminders) will appear in the online/System "Inbox" for each User. This Inbox can be accessed via the envelope in the top right-hand corner of the System, next to the User's name and photo. People & Culture Users can access a complete history of all Tasks & Notifications (current and previous) assigned/sent across the organisation via the 'Workflow History' Tab in the Inbox. Alternatively, Users can choose to activate a "Summary" email to their email Inbox (see below for instructions).

NOTES: There are two types of 'Notifications' sent by the System:

Notifications that are 'Read' or 'View' only (and don't require any actions to be taken).
Notifications that are associated with an 'Action' required by the Recipient (which will contact a 'Click Here' link relating to the 'Action' required).

The 'General' Tab displays both of these types of Notifications. If/when a Notification relates to an 'Action' and that action is 'Completed,' then the notification will move to the 'Completed' Tab. If the 'Action' is not taken, then it will move to the 'Overdue' Tab. However, general View/Read only Notifications will remain under the 'General' Tab permanently.

All Tasks, Notifications and Reminders that are sent to the actual email inbox of Employees will contain a link that says: 'Please Click Here to login and view this notification.' The text 'Click Here' contains a hyperlink that will take the User directly to this notification in their System Inbox. It will also open the relevant/associated notifications and tasks for review.

Tasks & Notifications will appear in this Widget in the following manner:

My Info Dashboard - Users see Tasks & Notifications that relate to them as an Employee only.
Manager Dashboard - Users see Tasks & Notifications that relate to their role as a Manager. Therefore only Tasks & Notifications for actions the Manager needs to take in relation to their Team Members appear in the Widget on this Dashboard.
People & Culture Dashboard - Users see Tasks & Notifications that relate to them as a People & Culture User. Therefore Tasks & Notifications related to their management of all Employees appear in the Widget on this Dashboard.

Field Name	Description
Notifications	This functionality allows the User to trigger a "Summary" email re Tasks and Notifications relevant to them/their User Group. To enable a notification summary email: 1. Click on "Notifications" (top right-hand corner of the Widget). The standard setting in the System is for all Users to receive an Email Summary Daily at 8:00am. This can be changed using the options below. The settings options for Tasks & Notifications Emails are: Notification Frequency - Daily or Once a Week. The User needs to specify if they want to receive a Summary email daily or weekly. NOTE: If the 'Notifications/Summary' setting is not activated, then Tasks & Notifications will be sent in real-time (send when triggered). That is, an individual email for each Task & Notification is sent to the User's Inbox in Subscribe-HR and also to their Company email/Inbox in real-time. This is the System Standard/Default (unless changed as outlined below). If the 'Notifications/Summary' setting is activated then a 'Summary' of Tasks & Notifications will be sent to the User's Inbox in Subscribe-HR, setting selected above (Daily or Weekly). Notification Start Day and Time - the User needs to specify the start day and time for the Email Summary/ies. The User will then continue to receive a Summary email at the same time, (per the settings selected (daily or weekly)) unless/until the settings are changed. NOTE: If you activate a Summary email (daily or weekly) that means that Employees who are sent specific email notifications re 'Tasks' (e.g. Time Off authorisation requests or Vacancy Requisition authorisation requests) won't receive those notifications separately (and they will need to review their System Info and/or Tasks & Notifications Widget separately to see if they receive any such notifications throughout the day/between summary emails). 2. Click "Activate" to activate these settings. 3. To change or deactivate the summary email, click on "Notifications" to reopen the Wizard. For changes, simply change the notification frequency, notification start day or time settings, then click "Update." To disable the current settings, simply click "Disable." This will return the delivery of Tasks & Notifications to the Default - which is a Daily Summary at 8:00am. Depending on the Employee's User Group/Permissions (Employee, Manager, HR/People & Culture Manager), the User will receive the following information in their Summary Email: Employees - will receive a summary of only their own Tasks & Notifications (as displayed in their Inbox). Managers - will receive a summary of their own Tasks & Notifications (as displayed in their Inbox), as well as those in the Inboxes of the Employees in their team. HR Managers/People & Culture Users - will receive a summary of their own Tasks & Notifications (as displayed in their Inbox), as well as those in the Inboxes of Managers and Employees (that is, they will receive a Summary of everyone's Tasks & Notifications as at that date/time).
Manage Delegation	Employees can delegate authority to someone else in their absence. Delegations work as follows: Employees - can delegate authority to/for their Manager to receive, review and/or action standard and task related notifications. Managers - can delegate authority to their Manager, other Managers or People & Culture Users to receive, review and/or action standard and task related notifications. They Can also delegate Authority on behalf of their direct reports, so that the person to whom delegation is assigned can receive, review and/or action standard and task related notifications. People & Culture Users - can delegate authority to their Manager or People & Culture Users to receive, review and/or action standard and task related notifications. They Can also delegate Authority on behalf of their direct reports, so that the person to whom delegation is assigned can receive, review and/or action standard and task related notifications (per the above).
Search	This is a text field which you can use to enter keywords to search for. The list below will display tasks and notification relating to the keywords entered.
Today	This Tab displays current Tasks & Notifications (due today - that is the date that the User/Employee is logged into the System). Once completed, Tasks (and their associated notifications) move to the 'Completed' Tab.
Upcoming	This Tab displays Tasks & Notifications due on any day/date after 'today' (see above). Once completed, Tasks (and their associated notifications) move to the 'Completed' Tab.
General	This Tab displays a list of all Notifications that are triggered/sent by the System. NOTE: There are two types of 'Notifications' sent by the System: Notifications that are 'Read' or 'View' only (and don't require any actions to be taken). Notifications that are associated with an 'Action' required by the Recipient (which will contact a 'Click Here' link relating to the 'Action' required). The 'General' Tab displays both of these types of Notifications. If/when a Notification relates to an 'Action' and that action is 'Completed,' then the notification will move to the 'Completed' Tab. If the 'Action' is not taken, then it will move to the 'Overdue' Tab. However, general View/Read only Notifications will remain under the 'General' Tab permanently.
Overdue	This Tab displays all Tasks & Notifications that are past their due date.
Completed	This Tab displays all Tasks that have been completed.
My Sent Tasks	This Tab displays tasks that the User has sent (either to themselves or someone else).
Workflow History	Displays a list containing the history of all actions, tasks and notifications (including a record of Authorisations, Cancellations and Rejections where relevant). The Workflow History includes actions, tasks and notifications currently in progress and those completed in the past. Each line item/record has a status. The action/task is either pending or completed. The history is arranged based the following icons: Notepad & Pencil - displays tasks/actions pending or completed (completed tasks/actions are date and time stamped and the action taken is recorded). Calendar - displays reminders that are sent to Employees about tasks/actions that need to be completed. Information ( 'i' ) - relates to authorisations taken by other Employees (not related to the logged in User). Show Related Tasks - appears when there are/have been a series of tasks/actions in a multi-step workflow process,, including actions/tasks not related to the logged ion User. NOTE: People & Culture Users can see the Work flow History for all notifications in the System (about all Employees/Tasks/Notifications). Managers can see the Work flow History for Tasks/Notifications about their direct reports/Team Members only. Employees can see the Work flow History for Tasks/Notifications about themselves only.
Filter	You can select filters to apply so that specific tasks and notifications will be displayed. You can filter the list by Solution (HR, Recruitment, Onboarding etc.) and/or delegated tasks.
Task Name	The subject of the task will appear under here.
Assigned To	The Employee the task or reminder was assigned to will appear here.
Relates To	The Employee the task or reminder relates to will appear here.
Due Date	Task due date will appear here. This determines if the task should appear in the today, upcoming or overdue section.
Filter (Column)	Filters selected against the task will appear under here.
Actions	Different Tasks and Notifications have different actions associated with them. The options are: View Message: Allows the User to view the notification/reminder message. Cancel: Allows the User to Cancel the Authorisation request. Authorise/Reject/Forward: Allows the User to Authorise, Reject or Forward the Authorisation request. Note: when an Authorisation is forwarded, it is assumed that the individual is Authorising the request and forwarding it to other Employees for further Authorisation. The request is not considered complete/fully Authorised until the final individual clicks the 'Authorise' button.

People & Culture - Company Policies Widget

The People & Culture Company Policies Widget allows HR/People & Culture Managers to access their Team's Company Policy Activity. The HR/People & Culture Manager can search for a Team Member and then use Filters to see which Company Policies Need to be attended to. Managers can Resend a notification to an Employee if that person has unopened/unread policies. The Company Policy Widget respects the User Group Permissions on the person accessing the system.

NOTE: Company Policies can be associated with 'Jobs,' 'Departments,' or 'Locations,' although Jobs are the primary association used. If a Job you're creating for a New Employee for doesn't have (a) Company Policy/(ies) assigned to it, you will not be able to complete this step in the New Employee Wizard and will be required to send Company Policies later via the Company Policies Widget (from the 'No Policies' Tab). It is therefore recommended that Users create and assign (a) Company Policy/(ies) to the Job (or Department/Location) via the Company Policies Wizard before you create a New Employee and place them in a Job.

The '+Create New' Link on the People & Culture version of the Company Policies Widget opens the Company Policies Wizard and allows them to create 'New,' edit/update 'Existing' or send 'Current' Company Policy/ies to Employee/s, Job/s, Department/s or Location/s.

NOTES:

For compliance purposes, the primary/preferred way to send Company Policies is to 'Link' them to 'Job/s' (as opposed to sending them individual Employee's on an 'Ad Hoc' basis), then either Location/s and/or Department/s.
- When each Company Policy record is created in the System, they should be 'Linked' to Job/s, Department/s and Location/s via the Company Policy Record (General > Core-HR > Company Policies > select a 'Company Policy' and update these fields.
  - Even though these 'Linked' fields aren't 'Mandatory,' to ensure that Company Policy features work correctly in the System (in the Onboarding Welcome packs/Workflows, the Crossboarding Workflows, and the No Policies Tab of the People & Culture User's Company Policies Widget, Users are advised, at a minimum, to 'Link' all Company Policies to a 'Job' as a minimum.

Navigation Option	Description
Search	Allows People & Culture Users to search Team to see the Company Policy Information for the Team Member being searched for.
Incomplete Tab	Shows Policies for the User that are not yet Opened and Read.
Completed Tab	Shows Policies that have been Opened and Read.
No Policies Tab	Shows Employees that have not been assigned any Company Policies to complete.
Filter	Allows you to Filter the Company Policies Table based on: Opened, Unopened, Read, Unread.
Policy	Allows you to Search all Policies based on the Filters you have applied.

People & Culture Widget - Company Policies – Incomplete Tab

Field Name	Description
Assigned To	The name of the Employee that a Company Policy has been assigned to.
Policy Name	The name of the Company Policy assigned to the Employee.
Opened	If the Employee has opened the Company Policy they have been assigned, a tick will be displayed in this column. If they’re haven’t opened it, a cross will be displayed.
Read	If the Employee has read the Company Policy they have been assigned, a tick will be displayed in this column. If they’re haven’t read it, a cross will be displayed.
Type	This column indicates what type of Company Policy it is E.g. Onboarding, Existing Employee, New Policy Update, New Employee, Auto Renew etc.
Link	This column displays a link to the Company Policy.
Received	This column specifies the date when the Company Policy was sent to the Employee.
Reminder	If the Company Policy is not yet complete, this column will display a recommended Action, e,g, Send Reminder.

People & Culture Widget - Company Policies – Completed Tab

Field Name	Description
Assigned To	The name of the Employee that a Company Policy has been assigned to.
Policy Name	The name of the Company Policy assigned to the Employee.
Opened	If the Employee has opened the Company Policy they have been assigned, a tick will be displayed in this column. If they’re haven’t opened it, a cross will be displayed.
Read	If the Employee has read the Company Policy they have been assigned, a tick will be displayed in this column. If they’re haven’t read it, a cross will be displayed.
Type	This column indicates what type of Company Policy it is E.g. Onboarding, Existing Employee ,New Policy Update, New Employee, Auto Renew etc.
Link	This column displays a link to the Company Policy.
Received	This column specifies the date when the Company Policy was sent to the Employee.
Read Date	This column specifies the date on which the Company Policy was read by the Employee.

People & Culture Widget - Company Policies – No Policies Tab

The 'No Policies' Tab is where Employees who have not been sent any Company Policies (that is, the Employee wasn't Onboarded, or they weren't sent any Company Policy/ies after their Employee record was created and there was no Company Policies 'Step' including in the Onboarding Welcome pack/Workflow) are listed. People & Culture users can 'Send Policies' to Employees, however, to send Policy/ies via this pathway requires that these Company Policies are 'Linked' to the Job the Employee holds, the Department the Employee works in, or the Location the Employee works at. The Onboarding Wizard Wiki contains more information about 'Linking' Company Policies to Jobs, Departments, or locations. It is not possible to send Company Policy/ies directly to an Employee. via this 'Send Policies' action/link. 'New' or 'Current/Existing' Company Policy/ies can be sent to (an) Employee/s via the Company Policies Wizard.

People & Culture Users can 'Send Policies' to 'All Employees,' whereas Managers can only 'Send Policies' to their Direct Reports.

Field Name	Description
Employee ID	The Employee ID for the User who has not been assigned any Company Policies.
Employee Name	The name of the Employee who has not been assigned any Company Policies.
User Account	This column will specify if the Employee has a User Account (it is not possible to send Company Policy/ies to Employees via the 'Send Policies' action/link if that Employee doesn't have an 'Active' user Account).
Send Policies and Send Reminder	If the Employee has not received any Company Policies, they will show up in this tab. E.G. They have been Onboarded without Company Policies, or they have not been Onboarded at all (E.G. if the Employee record was created via a Data Upload, or imported from/via a Payroll integration). Employee/s can be sent Company Policy/ies (Send Policies). This will send the Policy/ies and that have been 'Linked' to that Employee's Job, Department or Location. Company Policy/ies can be resent (Send Reminder) if the Employee has not opened/read/ and 'Agreed' to them (and a reminder needs to be sent). If you use the 'Send Policies' option to send Company Policies to an Employee who has not received any Company Policies previously (and who does not have an 'Active' User Account), you will be asked to 'Activate' their 'User Account' (by assigning ESS/Employee Service Service User Group (plus others if required)) before sending. All Employees/Users need a an Active User Account to be able to 'Open,' 'Read' and 'Accept' the Company Policy/ies.

People & Culture Widget - Announcements and Acknowledgements Widget

This widget allows for HR/People & Culture Managers to receive and view their relevant Announcements and Acknowledgements, as well as those for all other Employees. Recipients can view relevant Announcements, complete Surveys and view Employees who have been linked to their related Announcements and Acknowledgements. All Announcements and Acknowledgements, once completed/sent, will appear in the Announcements & Acknowledgements Widget for both Mangers and Employees to whom they were addressed. They will also appear in the Inbox of all addressees/recipients.

Field Name	Description
Announcements Tab	This tab displays all active and expired announcements posted by users.
Active (Under Announcements Tab)	Displays all announcements that have not exceeded their expiry date. Number in brackets displays the total number of active announcements
Expired (Under Announcements Tab)	Displays all announcements that have exceeded their expiry date. Number in brackets displays the total number of expired announcements.
Search Title (Under Announcements Tab)	This is a free text field that you can use to search Announcements based on keywords you enter in the search field.
Attachment (Under Announcements Tab)	Attach a Photo. This will appear on the Feed in the Announcements Dashboard.
Title (Under Announcements Tab)	This is the title of the created Announcement.
Type (Under Announcements Tab)	This is the type of the Announcement. E.g. Business Object, Highlight, People Related, Innovation, Policy.
Create Date (Under Announcements Tab)	This is the date and time the Announcement was created.
Expire Date (Under Announcements Tab)	The Announcement's expiry date. Once this date has passed, the announcement will move over to the Expired section.
Acknowledgement Name (Under Announcements Tab)	Acknowledgements made to employees and/or locations and/or departments will be displayed here. You can select/add specific recipients for your Acknowledgement here, or you can leave these fields blank.
Survey (Under Announcements Tab)	If a Survey has been linked, you can click "Check Answers" to view the status of answered Surveys. If no Survey linked, "N/A" will display.
Acknowledgements Tab	Clicking this tab will display all acknowledgements posted by users.
All Received Sub-Folder	Contains acknowledgements sent to/received by the Employee.
All Sent Sub-Folder	Contains acknowledgements sent by Employees.
Create Acknowledgement (Under Acknowledgements Tab)	Top Right of the Widget. Starts the New Acknowledgement Wizard, for you to be able to create a new acknowledgement. This is also available from the "START" menu.
Search Keyword (Under Acknowledgements Tab)	This is a free text field that you can use to search Announcements based on keywords you enter in the search field.
Create Date (Under Acknowledgements Tab)	This is the date and time the Acknowledgement was created.
Title (Under Acknowledgements Tab)	Displays the Title of the Acknowledgement.
Likes (Under Acknowledgements Tab)	Clicking the "thumbs up" icon will Like the Acknowledgement. The number beside it displays the total number of likes the Acknowledgement has received.
Comments (Under Acknowledgements Tab)	Clicking the speech bubble icon will allow you to enter in comments related to the Acknowledgement. The number beside it will display the total number of comments made against the Acknowledgement.
Sent To (Under Acknowledgements Tab)	Employees, locations and/or departments that have been acknowledged will be displayed here.
Sent By (Under Acknowledgements Tab)	The name of the individual who sent this Acknowledgement will be displayed here.
Actions (Under Announcements Tab)	Use this dropdown to action the following: Edit - edit Announcements. Delete - delete Announcements. View - view Announcements. View Survey - view an Surveys attached to/sent with the Announcement.
Actions (Under Acknowledgements Tab)	Use this dropdown to action the following: Edit - edit Acknowledgements. When you click Edit, you are able to edit the keywords of Acknowledgement, the content and the acknowledged employees. Delete - delete Acknowledgements. View - view Acknowledgements.

People & Culture – Training Widget

The People and Culture Training Widget allows People & Cultures users to access and manage Training Activity for all Employees. People & Culture Users can access Training Course, Event Information, Current Training and CPD Records for their team members. People & Culture Users and/or System Administrators can also create/set up Training related content (whereas Manager can't).

The Training Widget provides access to the following Training information and related features:

Training Analysis.
Mandatory Training.
Completed Training Records.
e-Learning (if the Go1 App is installed).
e-Learning Catalogue (if the Go1 App is installed).
Training Catalogue.
Training Events.
CPD Training.

The new Training Widget has been designed to do all the heavy lifting related to managing Face-to-Face and e-Learning Training.

People & Culture - Training Widget – Training Analysis Folder

The Training Analysis Folder provides a status of all the Training for each Employee at a glance. People & Culture users can also view the Training Guide for the Job that each Employee holds to compare it to their Training Analysis.

Field Name	Description
Search	This is a free text field that allows Users to filter the list based on specific keywords entered here.
Employee	This column contains the Employee name associated with that Training Analysis record.
Overdue	This column shows any Overdue Training. Refresher required and Mandatory Training can become Overdue.
Renewal Required	This column contains the number of Training Courses or Certificate/Licences that require the Employee to attend ‘Renewal’ Training.
To Do	This column contains the number of Training related ‘To Dos’ (Face-to-Face, Content or e-learning) for that Employee.
Mandatory	This column contains the number of ‘Mandatory’ Training Courses (Face-to-Face, Content, or e-learning) assigned to that Employee.
In Progress	This column contains the number of ‘In Progress’ Training Courses (Face-to-Face or e-learning) assigned to that Employee.
Waiting List	This column contains the number of Face-to-Face Training Courses that Employee is ‘Waitlisted’ for.
No Show	This column contains the number of ‘No Show’ Training Event (Face-to-Face) assigned to that Employee.
Completed	This column contains the number of ‘Completed’ Training Courses (Face-to-Face or e-learning) assigned to that Employee.
Actions	The options are: View Training Guide - The ‘Training Guide’ provides a summary of all the Training assigned to that Employee/Employee’s Job, which therefore makes that Training either a requirement or a suggestion for the Employee to complete.

People & Culture - Training Widget – Mandatory Training Folder

There are two types of Mandatory Training requirements:

Face-to-face: this requires an Employee to attend face-to-face training conducted by either the Employer, or a third-party. Employees are usually first placed on a waiting list a Course type, and then when the Course/Event is scheduled, they are added to the waiting list for the Course/Event and then booked to attend.
e-Learning: if a third-party e-Learning App is installed, then e-Learning is available within Subscribe-HR and all e-Learning content can be viewed and completed via the Training Widget.
Content: relates to Content Type that has been assigned as the Training Method. Allows for Content to be sent to the Persons Mandatory Training Tab in the Training widget so they can Acknowledge or Reject it. Content can be reissued if it's rejected. Certificate & Licence can be created from completed Content Acknowledgement via "Actions". A Training Record will show in the Employee Training Sub Folder and the Training Tab in the Training Widget, when the Content has been Acknowledged.

Mandatory Training can be assigned to an Employee in two ways:

Via the Job they hold: Mandatory Training can be assigned to Jobs via the Activation Hub > Core-HR Widget > Training Manager > Action > Assign Training > Create New > Tick ‘Mandatory at Start of Employment.’
Directly against the Employee Record: Mandatory Training can be assigned to the Employee via ‘Create New Mandatory Training Requirement’ in the Mandatory Training Folder of the Training Widget.

The Mandatory Training Folder in the Training Widget contains all the 'Mandatory Training Requirements' assigned to the Job held by an Employee, or to the Employee directly. Note that ‘Mandatory Training Requirements’ are not actual ‘Training Records.’ A Mandatory Training Requirement only becomes a 'Training Record' when the Employee has been scheduled to attend a Training Course Event (with a start date assigned). The Employee must then attend the Course Event and complete the Training for a Training Record (for that Mandatory Training Requirement) to appear on their Employee Training Records sub-object. Upon Renewal of the Mandatory Training being completed, the Renewal record for the Mandatory Training, will be shown in "To Do" in the Mandatory Training Tab.

For Training to be recognised as Mandatory - it must be flagged/marked as such. There are multiple ways to mark Training as 'Mandatory' (either when creating a Training type, or retrospectively if needed)

Via the Activation Hub > Core-HR Widget > Training Manager > Action > Assign Training > Create New > Tick ‘Mandatory at Start.’
Via the Activation Hub > Core-HR Widget > Training Manager > Face-to-Face Training > Select Training Record > Action > Assign Training > Action > 'Make Mandatory.'
Via the Activation Hub > Core-HR Widget > Training Manager > e-Learning Training > Select Training Record > Action > Assign Training > add Course/s to the 'Mandatory Training' field.

All Face-to-Face Mandatory Training 'Requirements' must be actioned (to create an actual Training Record) by the People & Culture User or System Administrator in one of two ways:

The Employee attends (and completes) an ad-hoc/one-off Course (usually with a third-party provider).
The Employee is added to a Course Waiting List (and then enrolled to attend the Face-to-Face Training Event) when that Course is next scheduled by the business.

Only when an Employee has completed a Face-to-Face Course/Event will a Training Record be assigned to their Employee/Training Record sub-object.

All Mandatory e-Learning Training requirements appear in the 'Mandatory Training' Folder and if e-Learning content has been assigned to the 'Mandatory Training' content Group for the Job that the Employee holds, then those Courses will also appear in the e-Learning Folder.

Field Name	Description
Search	This is a free text field that allows Users to filter the list based on specific keywords entered here.
+ Create New Mandatory Training Requirement	Allows the User to create a new Mandatory Training Requirement for an Employee. That ‘requirement’ needs to be actioned – either by enrolling the Employee in an e-Learning Course (which is only possible if a third-party e-Learning App is installed/integrated), creating a one-off Training Record, or by adding the Employee to a Course Waiting List. User can also create Content based Mandatory Training by Selecting the Training Method as Content. This allow for the person who the Training is being created for, to Acknowledge or Reject this from the Mandatory Training Tab.
To Do Tab	Displays the current Mandatory Training Requirements that need to be actioned for all Employees. Records that appear on this Tab are only ‘requirements,’ not actual Training Records. Training 'requirements' only become active, or ‘In Progress’ Training once the requirement is actioned. This is done either by an Employee (because the Training Requirement has been assigned to them and they have started it), or, when a People & Culture User or Manager enrols the Employee on an internal Training Course Event, an external one-off Training Course/Event, or they enrol the Employee in an e-Learning Course.
In Progress Tab	Displays all Mandatory Training Requirements that are in progress, that is, the Employee has either started their e-Learning training so as to fulfil that requirement, or they’ve been placed on a Course Waiting List/scheduled for a Course/Event.
Completed Tab	Displays all Mandatory Training Requirements that have been completed and for which a Training record has now been created.
All Tab	Displays all of the Mandatory Training Requirements listed above.
Employee	This column contains the Employee name that the mandatory training requirement is assigned to.
Mandatory Training Guide	This column contains the Training/Course type that has is assigned to the Employee as a 'Mandatory Training Requirement.' This requirement needs to be actioned, either by adding the Employee to a Course/Event Waiting list (for Face-to-Face Training), or enrolling them in e-Learning Training.
Delivery Method	This column specifies if the Mandatory Training Requirement is e-Learning or Face-to-Face.
Record Created	This column indicates how many days have elapsed since the Mandatory Training Requirement was assigned to the Employee. If more than 90 days have elapsed, the date on which the requirement was created will be displayed.
Start Date	This column indicates the Training start date if/when the Employee has been booked on a Course/Event or enrolled on an e-Learning Course.
End Date	This column indicates the Training end date if/when the Employee has been booked on a Course/Event or enrolled on an e-Learning Course.
Record Created	This column specifies the number of days since the Mandatory Training Requirement was created.
Actions	The options are: Add Employee to Course Waiting List - allows the User to add the Employee to the Course Waiting list so that they are then enrolled when an internal Training Event for that Course type is next scheduled. Add Employee to Event Waiting List - allows the User to add the Employee to an Event Waiting when a Course is scheduled. New Training Record – No Event - allows the User to create a ‘One-Off’ Training Record for training activity completed by the Employee outside the business (no internal ‘Training Event’ was attended by the Employee, but they did attend/complete Training elsewhere). History - displays the Training history related to that Mandatory Training Requirement. History Action for Content based Mandatory Training is available, in the "Rejected" Tab, which allows you to view the History or the Content - Acknowledgement / Rejection. Acknowledge - only relevant to "Content" based Training Method. It allows the user to view and Accept or Reject the "Content". When the User Click on the Action Acknowledge, they have the option to Accept or Reject. They they Reject, the Record goes to the Rejected Tab. Reissue - allows Manager and People and Culture User to Reissue Content that has been Rejected. Update - allows the User to Update the Training Record by adding notes, attaching the completion certificate etc. Create Certificate/Licence - where relevant, allows the User to create a Certificate/Licence based on/related to the Training completed by the Employee.
Statuses	Assigned: This means that the Mandatory Training Requirement is assigned to the person, but it has not been Action. Action meaning the person has not bee placed onto a Wait List for a Course or Event (or Attendee List), or they have not had a Training Record created without a Wait List (new Training Record No Event). Assigned Overdue. This means that the Mandatory Training has not been Actioned for a week based on the creation date of the Mandatory Training requirement (Following it being Assigned). Action should be taken e.g. New Training No Event or place the person onto a Wait List for a Course or Event. Renewal Required These records will show with this status, if a Mandatory Training is recorded as needing to be renewed. The renewal can be based on the Renewal Date in the Mandatory Training Record. So if a Training Record is Mandatory and a renewal is recorded it will show up in both the Training Tab and also the Mandatory Training Tab. Renewals be be either annual or based on the selected parameter. Completed This will show if the one of Training Record has been recorded as completed. It will also show here if the person was put onto a Training Event and they attended the Event. Attendees will be assigned a completed Training Record / Mandatory Training.

Note: Mandatory Training Required is what is called a filtered record and will not show as a Completed Training record until there is an outcome for the Requirements which is a completed Training Record. From either creating a Training Record - No Event or attending a Training Event.

People & Culture - Training Widget – Training Records Folder

There are Four types of Training Records:

One-Off Face-to-Face Training: this relates to ad-hoc/one-off Training attended and completed by the Employee.
Face-to-Face Training Course/Event: this relates to Training scheduled and provided by the business and completed by the Employee.
e-Learning: if a third-party e-Learning App is installed, then e-Learning is Training is completed via the Subscribe-HR Training Widget.
Content: based on PDF's, Text Information or Videos that have been linked to Mandatory Training which can be Acknowledged or Rejected.

The Training Records Folder contains all the current Training assigned to and completed by Employees. Training Records are not created until the Employee has completed the Training requirement (attended the Course Event, or completed the e-Learning Training).

Once completed, People & Culture Users can, where relevant, create a Certificate/Licence based on the Training Record.

People & Culture - Training Widget – +Create New Training Record Wizard

People & Culture Users can also create 'Ad Hoc' Training Records. This option is available for Users/Organisations that don't send Employees on Training Courses/Events Managed via Subscribe-HR's Core-HR Training Solution. The Ad Hoc '+Create New Training Record' Wizard provides a more efficient way to create and keep track of Training Records and 'Requirements.'

The '+Create New Training Record' Wizard is accessible via the 'Training Records' Tab of the Training Widget for People & Culture Users and Managers only (not Employees).

People & Culture - Training Widget – +Create New Training Record Wizard - Who Is This Request For?

1. Requesting for – the options are:

Myself - enables the User to create an Ad Hoc Training Record for themselves.
Team Member - enables the User to create an Ad Hoc Training Record for a Team Member.

1. Team Member - appears if 'Team Member' selected in the previous/above field. Search and select the Team Member you're creating the Ad Hoc Training Record for. NOTE: People & Culture Users can create an Ad Hoc Training Record for anyone/all Employees in the organisation. Managers can only create Ad Hoc Training Records for their Team Members. Click "Next.'

People & Culture - Training Widget – +Create New Training Record Wizard - Job Training Guide

1. Job Training Guide - This Step in the Wizard displays the ‘Training Guide,’ which provides a summary of all the Training assigned to that Employee/Employee’s Job, which therefore makes that Training either a requirement or a suggestion for the Employee to complete. Click "Next.'

People & Culture - Training Widget – +Create New Training Record Wizard - Job Training Guide

1. Mandatory Training Guide (non-editable) – provides a list of the ‘Mandatory Training’ assigned to the ‘Job’ that the Employee holds (and therefore that the Employee is required to complete as part of their Employment)

People & Culture - Training Widget – +Create New Training Record Wizard - Training Record

1. Course – When creating an ‘Ad Hoc’ Training Record (that is a Training Record for Training completed outside of an officially run Course/Training Event via Subscribe-HR’s Core-HR Training features. E.G. by a third party provider, or for an historical Training Course that was completed in the past), Course = the name of the Course the Employee completed.
2. Start Date – the date when the Course started.
3. Finish Date – the date when the Course finished.
4. Renewal Required – if the Training needs to be repeated/renewed in the future, tick this box.
5. Renewal Date – a new ‘Training Requirement’ will be generated when this anniversary date is met. This will assign a new ‘Mandatory Training’ requirement (if ‘Mandatory for Job’ is ticked), or the same ‘Non-Mandatory’ Training requirement if ‘Mandatory for Job’ is not ticked):

If the Training requirement is ‘Mandatory’ – when the renewal date occurs, the ‘Requirement’ will appear in the Training Widget under ‘Mandatory Training’ Tab > ‘To Do’ Subtab.
If the Training requirement is ‘Non-Mandatory’ – when the renewal date occurs, the ‘Requirement’ will appear in the Training Widget under the ‘Training Records’ > Tab > ‘To Do’ Subtab.

6. Notify Days Before Renewal – a notification will go out to the Employee’s Manager when this date is reached.
7. Training Reason – Specify the reason for the Training. E.G. selecting ‘CPD’ will result in the Training Record appearing in the CPD Tab of the Training Widget.
8. Status – this is locked to ‘Completed’ for Ad Hoc Training Records (in progress training records will have to be created via the LHS (General > Core-HR > Employees > [Select Employee] > Training Records > Create New) menu.
9. Mandatory for Job – If checked/ticked, this Training Record will appear on the ‘Mandatory’ Tab of the Training Widget and be considered/classified as a ‘Mandatory Training Requirement’ for the Employee (until that requirement is completed/fulfilled by completing a Course/attending a live Course/Event).
10. Type – specify a Training type.
11. Attachment – add Attachment/s here (proof of completion for example).
12. Notes – use this field to record notes about the Training/Employee/attendance etc. Click "Next."
13. Summary – the final screen for the New Training Record Wizard is a summary of all your choices throughout the Wizard. Check and confirm that all the correct information has been captured. If you need to make changes, use “Previous” (bottom right of Wizard) to trace your steps back through the Wizard, and then use “Next” (bottom right of Wizard) to return to the final summary page once all changes have been made. When you’re ready to complete your "New Training Record Wizard" click “Submit.”
14. Success – if your New Training Record Wizard has been submitted correctly, you will see a success message. If not, you will see an error message. If you see an error message, please retrace your steps back through the Wizard and correct any issues. Otherwise, please contact support.

Field Name	Description
Search	This is a free text field that allows Users to filter the list based on specific keywords entered here.
+ Create New Training Record	Allows the User to create a new Training Record – either by creating a one-off Training Record, or by adding the Employee to a Course Waiting List.
To Do Tab	Displays the Training that has been assigned to an Employee, but not yet commenced.
In Progress Tab	Displays the Training that has been the Employee has started and is now in progress.
Completed Tab	Displays all the Training that has been completed by the Employee and for which a Training Record has now been created.
Did Not Attend Tab	Displays all the Face-to-Face Training the Employee was assigned/booked to attend, but did not. No Training Record is created if the Employee is scheduled but does not attend a Training Course/Event.
All Tab	Displays all of the Training Records listed above.
Employee	This column contains the Employee name that the Training is assigned to.
Course Name	This column contains the Course Name that was assigned to the Employee – either as a Face-to-Face or e-Learning requirement.
Start Date	This column contains the date the Course started.
End Date	This column contains the date the Course ended.
Type	This column contains the type of Training assigned to the Employee. The options are: Internal, External.
Delivery Method	This column specifies if the Training requirement is e-Learning or Face-to-Face.
Actions	The options are: History - displays the Training history related to that Training. Update - allows the User to Update the Training Record by adding notes, attaching the completion certificate etc. Create Certificate/Licence - where relevant, allows the User to create a Certificate/Licence based on/related to the Training completed by the Employee.
Statuses	Renewal Required: This status shows if Training needs to be renewed based on the renewal parameters in the Training Record. E.g. Annually or other renewal date. If Training is Mandatory, and a Renewal is required, it will also show in the Mandatory Training Tab as requiring renewal/refresh. Assigned Overdue This status means that the Training renewal is older than 7 days from record creation and nothing has been done with the requirement. Assigned This is for e-Learning and Training that has been assigned. E.g. if Someone has been assigned e-learning from the Catalogue but the Course is not started is will be Assigned. This will also be used for Mandatory Training. When someone starts, the Mandatory Training Filtered Record is Assigned, in the "To Do" Tab. Renewal Required Overdue This Status shows if the Renewal of a Training Course has passed 30 Days. It becomes Overdue. Booked This is used for identifying people that are Booked onto a Training Event, but the Event start date has not been reached. This will show in the "To Do" Tab with the Status 'Booked.'

People & Culture - Training Widget – e-Learning Folder

If a third-party e-Learning App is installed, then the e-Learning Folder will appear in the Training Widget (if not, this Tab will be absent).

The e-Learning Folder displays all e-Learning courses that have been assigned to Employees across one of four content Groups:

General Training - this Group contains standard e-Learning Training that all Employees must complete as part of the Employment.
Induction Training - this Group contains e-Learning Induction Training that is specific to the job the Employee holds.
Mandatory Training - this Group contains e-Learning Mandatory Training that is specific to the job the Employee holds.
Job Training - this Group contains e-Learning Job Training that is specific to the job the Employee holds.

NOTE: Managers and People & Culture users are only able to ‘View’ e-Learning Courses that they have enrolled other Employees in. For Compliance reasons, Managers and People & Culture users can’t start/play the Course. The only e-Learning content they can play/start is content assigned to them.

Field Name	Description
Search	This is a free text field that allows Users to filter the list based on specific keywords entered here.
Assigned Tab	This Tab displays all the e-Learning Courses that have been assigned to the Employee (that they’ve been enrolled in), but not yet started.
In Progress Tab	This Tab displays all the e-Learning Courses that the Employee has started (but not yet completed).
Completed Tab	This Tab displays all the e-Learning Courses that the Employee has completed.
Employee	This column contains the Employee name that the e-Learning Training is assigned to.
Course Name	This column contains the e-Learning Course name that has been assigned to the Employee.
Assigned Date	This column specifies the date that the e-Learning Course was assigned to the Employee.
Completed Date	This column specifies the date that the e-Learning Course was completed by the Employee.
Type	This column contains the type of Training assigned to the Employee. The options are: General Training. Mandatory Training (this is Job specific). Induction Training (this is Job specific). Job Training (this is Job specific).
Actions	The options are: Enrol - allows the User to Enrol an Employee in a course. Play - allows the User to Play a course that has been assigned to them. NOTE: for compliance reasons, only Employees can ‘Play’ e-Learning content via the ‘My Info’ Training Widget. Managers and People & Culture Users can’t ‘Play’ (or ‘Resume’) any e-Learning content assigned to other Employees. Start - allows the User to start a course. Resume - allows the User to Resume a Course they’ve started, but haven’t yet finished. History - displays the Training history related to that Training. Create Certificate/Licence - where relevant, allows the User to create a Certificate/Licence based on/related to the e-Learning Training completed by the Employee.

People & Culture - Training Widget – e-Learning Catalogue Folder

If a third-party e-Learning App is installed, then the Online Training Catalogue Folder will appear in the Training Widget (if not, it will be absent).

The e-Learning Catalogue Folder displays a list of all courses in the third-party e-Learning provider’s course catalogue. The content Table for this Tab will appear blank unless/until the User searches for content. After searching the e-Learning Catalogue using a keyword search, a list of relevant Training content will be displayed. Managers and People & Culture users can enrol Employees in Courses, or Employees can enrol themselves in a Course.

Once an Employee is enrolled in a Course, that Course will appear under the e-Learning Folder on the ‘To Do’ Sub-Tab until the Employee starts/plays the Course, at which time it will move to the ‘In Progress’ Tab.

NOTE: Managers and People & Culture users are only able to ‘View’ e-Learning Courses that they have enrolled other Employees in. For Compliance reasons, Managers and People & Culture Users can’t start/play the Course. The only e-Learning content they can play/start is content assigned to them.

Field Name	Description
Search	This is a free text field that allows Users to filter the list based on specific keywords entered here. Note: Users must enter a search term to generate a list of results in the Widget (otherwise this Tab will remain empty).
Course Name	This column contains the name of the Course that is related to the search term used.
Description	This column displays the thumbnail for the Course provided by the third-party e-Learning provider. Click on the thumbnail and a popup window appears including a Course description.
Type	This column specifies the type of Course. The options are: Video Course. Interactive.
Duration	This column displays the duration of the Course content, or the time it will take to completed the Course (both in minutes).
Actions	Enrol Users - allows the User to enrol other Employees to take this Course Enrol Me - allows the User to enrol themselves to take this Course.

People & Culture - Training Widget – Training Catalogue Folder

The Training Catalogue Folder enables Users to create and manage Face-to-Face Courses run by the Organisation (either in-house or by an external third-party provider).

Field Name	Description
Search	This is a free text field that allows Users to filter the list based on specific keywords entered here. Note: Users must enter a search term to generate a list of results in the Widget (otherwise this Tab will remain empty).
+ Create New Course	Allows the User to create a new Face-to-Face Course type to be run by the Organisation (either in-house or by an external third-party provider). Employees can be added to a Course Waiting List, and when Courses meet minimum attendee requirements, a Course Event can be created and Employee confirmed to attend.
Course Name	This column contains the name of the Training Course.
Max Attendee	This column displays the maximum number of attendees allowed for that Course type.
Min Attendee	This column displays the minimum number of attendees required to run a Face-to-Face event for that Course type.
Desired Attendee Count	This column shows the desired level/number of attendees at which point the Course can be run as an Event.
Waiting List Count	This column displays the current number of attendees wait listed for that Course type.
Actions:	Waiting List - allows the User to view the Waiting List, enrol other Employees to take this Course type, or create a Course Event. Events - allows the User to see all linked events for this Course type. Edit - allows the User to edit information for this Course type.

Note: System e-mails will send to Employees, Managers and People and Culture users notifying of Course Wait List bookings.

People & Culture - Training Widget – Training Events Folder

The Training Events Folder enables Users to create and manage Face-to-Face Training Events run by the Organisation (either in-house or by an external third-party provider).

]

Field Name	Description
Search	This is a free text field that allows Users to filter the list based on specific keywords entered here. Note: Users must enter a search term to generate a list of results in the Widget (otherwise this Tab will remain empty).
+ Create New Course Event	Allows the User to create a new Face-to-Face Course Event to be run by the Organisation (either in-house or by an external third-party provider). Employees can be added to a Course Waiting List, and when Courses meet minimum attendee requirements, a Course Event can be created and Employee confirmed to attend.
Upcoming Tab	Displays a list of all upcoming Course Events.
In Progress Tab	Displays a list of all Course Events currently in progress.
Completed Tab	Displays a list of all completed Course Events.
All Tab	Displays a list of all Course Events related activity across the Organisation.
Calendar	Displays a calendar view of all Course Events across the Organisation.
Event Name	This column contains the name of the Course Event.
Provider	This column displays the Course Event Provider.
Start Date	This column displays the start date of the Course Event.
Finish Date	This column displays the finish date of the Course Event.
Actions:	Waiting List - allows the User to add Employees to the Attendee List for this Course Event. Attendee List - allows the User to see the Attendee List for this Course Event. Edit - allows the User to edit information for this Course Event.

Note: System e-mails will send to Employees, Managers and People and Culture users notifying of Event Wait List bookings. They will also be sent if someone is moved from the Wait List to the Attendee List. As well as notifications being sent notifying of successful attendance of the Event, or No Show if the person was recorded as not showing up. There are buttons on the Attendee list. The "Invitation Button", will be available prior to the start date of the Training Event. The "No Show" and "Confirmation" buttons will show following the completion of the Training Event.

People & Culture - Training Widget – CPD Folder

The CPD (Continuing Professional Development) Folder provides a status of all the CPD Training for each Employee at a glance. People & Culture users can also view the CPD requirements for the Job that each Employee holds to see how much of their annual CPD Training requirement that Employee has completed.

Field Name	Description
Search	This is a free text field that allows Users to filter the list based on specific keywords entered here.
Points Dropdown/Filter	Filter CPD Training Hours based on total points (options provided).
Timeframe Dropdown/Filter	Filter CPD Training Hours based on CPD points in a specified timeframe.
Employee	This column contains the Employee name that the CPD Training is assigned to.
Current CPD	This column contains the total current CPD hours the Employee has completed in the annual cycle. The annual cycle options are: Calendar year (1 January to 31 December). Financial year (1 July to 30 June).
Total Required CPD	This column contains the total annual CPD requirement for that Employee during the annual CPD cycle.
CPD Training Cycle	This column contains indicates the following: If the Job that the Employee holds has a CPD Training Cycle (and Cycle timeframe) assigned then the Employee’s Job will appear in this column. The CPD Training Cycle timeframe (from and to dates) will also appear (based on either the Calendar year or Financial year setting). If there is no CPD Training Cycle assigned then a ‘No CPD Cycle’ message will appear. If the Job assigned to the Employee as an ‘Annual CPD Target’ (number of hours) assigned, then the target number of hours will appear, in addition to the actual number of CPD hours the Employee has completed to so far (within the specified timeframe).
Action:	View CPD Training Breakdown - displays the Face-to-Face and e-Learning (if a third-party solution is integrated) CPD requirements for that Employee.

People & Culture - Training Widget – Skills Folder

The Skills Folder contains the current Skills that all Employees have been assessed for during a Performance Review Cycle, or which have been assigned/assessed on an Ad Hoc basis. A 'current' skill is defined as the 'most recent' record of a Skill that has been created/assigned to an Employee. The Employee may have 'previous' records of assignment/assessment for a particular Skill (for example if they were assessed for that Skill in a previous/older Performance Review Cycle). Older versions of Skills are not displayed in the Tab and can be found via the Employee's Skills record in Performance Management.

People & Culture Users are the only Users who can create 'Ad Hoc' Skills (outside of a Performance Review Cycle) for Employees. However, if there is a 'Performance Review Cycle' (Cycles or Start Date-based) activated in the System, the '+Create New' option on the Skills Tab will be deactivated. Users can only create Skills using one method or the other (not both at the same time).

When enrolling Employees in Courses, Events or e-Learning based on 'Skills' - the Skill/s will be 'matched' to Courses/Course Events. However, for e-Learning (if a third-party App is installed/integrated), the User will need to search the 'Catalogue' to find e-Learning Courses related to the Skilled then enrol Employees in an e-Learning Course.

Field Name	Description
+ Create Skill	Top Right of the Widget. Starts the Skill Wizard, and allows the User to select a Skill from the 'Skills Library' and assign it to an Employee.
Search Keyword	This is a free text field that you can use to search the Skill s Tab for an Employee name, or for a Skill Type.
Current Sub-Tab	Displays the Skills that the Employee was assigned/assessed for during the current/most recent Performance Review Cycle.
Gaps Sub-Tab	Displays the gap/s between the Skills that Job requires and the Skills that Employee currently does/does not have.
Employee	This column contains the Employee name that the CPD Training is assigned to.
Skill Name	The name of the Skill assigned to/for which the Employee was assessed.
Date Created	Displays the Date that the Skill was assigned to the Employee for assessment. Or, if the Skill was created Ad Hoc by a People & culture User (not via a Performance Review Cycle), the date the Skill was created/assigned to the Employee.
Linked Cycle	If the Skill was assigned to an Employee and assessed by the Employee/Manager as part of a Performance Review Cycle - a link to the most recent/current Performance Review Cycle will appear here. There will be a record for the Skill assessed by the Employee, and another for that Skill assessed by their Manager.
Score	Displays the Score that the Assessor gave to the Employee for that Skill Type.
Date Created	The date the the Skill listed for the Employee was created.
Assessed By	The name of the Individual who assessed the Employee for that Skill Type.
Assessed Date	Displays the Date that the Skill was assigned to the Employee and assessed (as part of a Performance Review Cycle).
Skill Gap	Specifies if the Employee has a 'Gap' for the Skill listed.
Required for Job	Specifies Job that the 'Skill/Gap' relates to.
Actions	Use this dropdown to action the following: Add Employee to Course Waiting List - allows the User to add the Employee to the Course Waiting list so that they are then enrolled when an internal Training Event for that Course type is next scheduled. Add Employee to Event Waiting List - allows the User to add the Employee to an Event Waiting when a Course is scheduled. Add Employee to e-Learning Course (Only when e learning is enabled) - allows the User to add the Employee to an e-Learning Course relevant to the Skill/s Gap. Create Training Record - allows the User to a Training Record for that Employee.

People & Culture - Talent Profile Widget

The Talent Profile widget contains summary information for all of the key areas of an Employee Talent based information. Including: Certificates and Licences, Goals, PDP, Catch-ups and so on. There is also a Summary View and PDF available which is located at the top right of the Talent Profile Widget. The Talent Profile Widget can work in conjunction with the Compliance Widget, Performance Widget and the Training Widget. The data listed in the Talent Profile Widget is an aggregation of all the data in these Widgets. There are functions within the Light Boxes to take the user to the respective widgets so that processing of data can occur. E.g. Certificate and Licences drill down - opens a light box which allows you to see all data, then you can open the widget for that data by clicking the button at the Top Left. This works regardless if the User has that widget in their Dashboard. People and Culture users can search any Employees to view the information available in the Talent Profile Widget.

Field Name	Description
Certificates And Licences	This number represents the number of ACTIVE Certificate and Licence Records. If you click on the Icon or Number a light Box will appear showing ALL Certificate and Licence records. Grouped by Active, Expiring and Expired. Click the "View Compliance Widget", button to be taken to the Compliance Widget - Full: Maximized View. Click Export PDF to export a PDF version of the data.
Background Checks	This number represents the number of "Background Check" records for the Employee. If you click on the Icon or Number a light Box will appear showing Past Background Checks. Grouped by Past. Click Export PDF to export a PDF version of the data.
Education And Qualifications	This number represents the number of ACTIVE Education and Qualification Records. If you click on the Icon or Number a light Box will appear showing ALL Education and Qualifications records. Grouped by Active, Expiring and Expired. Click the "View Compliance Widget", button to be taken to the Compliance Widget - Full: Maximized View. Click Export PDF to export a PDF version of the data.
Training	This number represents the number of Training Records. If you click on the Icon or Number a light Box will appear showing ALL Training records. Grouped by To-do, In Progress and Completed. Click the "View Training Widget", button to be taken to the Training Widget - Full: Maximized View. Click Export PDF to export a PDF version of the data.
Catch-ups	This number represents the number of "Active and Upcoming" Catch-ups. If you click on the Icon or Number a light Box will appear showing Active and Upcoming Catch-ups. Grouped by Active and Upcoming. Click the "View Performance Widget", button to be taken to the Performance Widget - Full: Maximized View. Click Export PDF to export a PDF version of the data.
Acknowledgements	This number represents the number of "Received and Sent" Acknowledgements. If you click on the Icon or Number a light Box will appear showing Received and Sent Acknowledgements. Grouped by Received and Sent. Click the "View Performance Widget", button to be taken to the Performance Widget - Full: Maximized View. Click Export PDF to export a PDF version of the data.
Work History	This number represents the number of "Work History" records for the Employee. If you click on the Icon or Number a light Box will appear showing Past Work History. Grouped by Past. Click Export PDF to export a PDF version of the data.
Goals	This number represents the number of "Not Started, On Track, Behind, At Risk, Completed" Goals. If you click on the Icon or Number a light Box will appear showing Not Started, On Track, Behind, At Risk, Completed Goals. Grouped by Not Started, On Track, Behind, At Risk, Completed. Click the "View Performance Widget", button to be taken to the Performance Widget - Full: Maximized View. Click Export PDF to export a PDF version of the data. Click the "Update Status" button to update the "Goal" status.
Skills	This number represents the number of "Current and Gaps" for Skills. If you click on the Icon or Number a light Box will appear showing Current and Gap Skills. Grouped by Current and Gap. Click the "View Performance Widget", button to be taken to the Performance Widget - Full: Maximized View. Click Export PDF to export a PDF version of the data.
Performance Score	There is no drilldown here. It just displays the most recent Performance Review Score. Based on how the formula being used in the Review. E.g. Average of all assessment criteria. Like Skills, Goals, Values and Behaviours. Click Export PDF to export a PDF version of the data.
Current PDP	This will show the current PDP including current GOALS. You can update the status of the Goals by using the Update Status button. Click the "View Performance Widget", button to be taken to the Performance Widget - Full: Maximized View. Click Export PDF to export a PDF version of the data. The Employee and Manager have the ability to send a Summary on Weekly, Fortnightly or Monthly basis. The summary function will work within the Period of the PDP. To Cancel the Summary, Press Cancel. If you are an Employee you can choose to send a Summary to yourself and or your Manager. If the send summary is not on, it will say "Send Summary - Off". Goals can only be linked to a PDP, through the PDP step or through the Performance Review if a Performance Review / Cycle is Active. PDP can only be used if there is a PDP Step in the Performance Cycle - Review process. E-mail notifications for Reminders will be sent to the Subscribe-HR inbox and e-mail. Recipients can click on the URL to view the PDP in Subscribe-HR. NOTE the e-mails sent are system e-mails not workflow e-mails. Only S-HR developers can use manage these.
Next Review Date	This will show the next review date for the Person. There is no Drill Down.

Talent Profile Summary PDF

The Talent Profile Summary contains the following Employee Summary Information. This Summary can be PDF'd. People and Culture users can PDF any Talent Profile summary for any Employee. Search the Talent Profile Widget for the Employee. Then View Summary and Export the Profile from there.

Field Name	Description
First Name and Surname	Name of the Employee
Photo	Shows Photo of the Employee
Role	The Role of the Employee
Employee ID	The Indentification Number for the Employee which can be used to find the Employee in Subscribe-HR
Department	The Department the Employee is in
Location	Location of the Employee
Start Date	The Start Date of the Employee
Manager	The Primary Manager of the Employee
Length of Service	The time which the Employee has been employed
Annual Leave Balance	Current Balance for Annual Leave for the Employee
Personal Leave Balance	Current Balance for Personal Leave for the Employee
Roles	Lists the Roles of the Employee. Current Role/Job is at the Top. Dates Represent the Start and End Date for the Roles/Jobs
Work History	List of Previous Jobs prior to Employment with your Company. This information could have been entered during the Recruitment Process and or it is stored against the Employee - Work History Sub Folder.
Certificates and Licences	List of Current Certificates and Licence Records. This information could have been entered during the Recruitment Process and or it is stored against the Employee - Certificates and Licences Sub Folder.
Background Checks	List of Current Background Check Records. This information could have been entered during the Recruitment Process and or it is stored against the Employee - Background Check Sub Folder
Education and Qualifications	List of Active Education and Qualifications Records. This information could have been entered during the Recruitment Process and or it is stored against the Employee - Education and Qualifications Sub Folder
Acknowledgements	List of received Acknowledgements.This information comes from the Performance Widget - Process
Top Right - Reviews	Shows current Review which is active. It shows the Progress of the current review. Shows the Final Score. Shows Next Review Date if there is one
Skills	Shows Current Skills. No Scores
Goals	Shows Current Goals. No Scores. Shows the Status of the Goals
Export PDF Button	Bottom Left of Screen. Allows you to Export the PDF to Print. Save to Desktop.

People & Culture - Performance Management Widget

The Performance Management Widget allows People and Culture users to view, create and manage Employee Performance Reviews within the System.

How to Navigate to the Performance Management Widget

This widget allows for Users to quickly and easily manage Performance through each of the following processes by clicking on the relevant “Folder”:

Reviews - view/create/manage Performance Reviews and Performance Workflow process/es.
Goals - view/create/manage Employee Goals related to the Performance Review and Performance Cycles, (or those created on a one-off/ad hoc basis). Goals can be linked to Business Objectives also. Completed Goals can also be brought into a current Goal Define step to be used again in a Review.
Catch-Ups - view/create/manage Catch-Ups related to the Performance Review and Performance Cycles, (or those created on a one-off/ad hoc basis).
Acknowledgements - view/create/manage Acknowledgements related to the Performance Review and Performance Cycles, (or those created on a one-off/ad hoc basis).
Skills - view/create/manage Skills related to the Performance Review and Performance Cycles, (or those created on a one-off/ad hoc basis).

In each of these Folders, there are a series of 'Tabs' that provide different functionality for managing Performance Reviews and Performance Review Cycles (related to Reviews). Within each Tab, there is a table that contains different columns. The Folders, Tabs, and Columns are explained below.

From within the Performance Management Widget itself, there are a series of buttons (that launch Wizards) related to creating or managing Performance Reviews, or specifying and activating Performance Review Cycles. These Wizards include:

Select Review Process - this button allows Users to select which type of Performance Review Process they want to use/activate. The two options are:
- Based on Cycles - this will tie individual and /or Groups of Employees to the same Performance Review Cycle/s so that everyone assigned to that Cycle gets Reviewed at the same time.
- Based on Start Date - this will tie the Performance Review Cycle to the Start Date of the Employee.

NOTE: you must "Select" and then "Activate" the Review Process you want to use. Instructions on how to do this can be found below.

Send Review - allows HR/P&C Managers to create and send a new Performance Management Review.
Stop Review Process - allows HR/P&C Managers to stop the Performance Review process currently being used and choose the other option (swap between Cycles/Start Date).
+ Create Goal - allows HR/P&C Managers to create Goals for all Employees. New Goals can also be created from the Employee Goal Wizard which is available via the Wizards "START" menu. Goals can be linked to Business Objectives also.
+ Create Skills - allows HR/P&C Managers to create Skills for all Employees. Skills are linked to Jobs or Employees.
+ Create Catch-Up - allows HR/P&C Managers to create Catch-Ups for all Employees. New Catch Ups can also be created from the Catch Up Wizard (coming soon) which is available via the Wizards "START" menu.

These Widgets can be moved around in the Dashboard. They can also be removed from the Dashboard. This can be done in Maintenance --> Groups --> Permissions --> Select a Group and Go to the Widgets.

People & Culture - Performance Management Widget – Review Cycle Wizard for Cycles based Performance Reviews

How to use the Performance Review Cycle Wizard for ‘Cycle’ based Performance Reviews:
1. Click on "Select Review Process" button which is located on the top right corner of the Performance Management Widget. If a Review Cycle is already in progress, you will instead see a red "Stop Review Process" button which enables you to stop/cancel the current Review Cycle being used and select another option by following the instructions below.
2. A lightbox will appear prompting you to select from a dropdown the Review type. Select "Based on Cycle."
3. Click "Submit."
4. The System will take you back to the Performance Management Widget. "Current Review Method = (Cycles)" with a green "On" status will display on the top right of the widget. NOTE: you must click "On" again, which will open another popup, and then select "Activate" to activate that Review Cycle type (this step must be completed for the remainder of the process to work).
5. To create a 'Cycle' based Performance Review, click on "Create Review."
6. A popup appears confirming the review method being created is based on 'Cycles.’ Click "Delete" to remove the 'Cycle' method. Otherwise click "Activate" to turn it on and start sending Reviews.
7. You can now click "Send Review" to send a new Performance Review based on Cycles. This will guide the User through the "New Performance Review" Wizard. The Cycles Wizard the following to be specified:

Name: the name of the Performance Review.
Template: select the Performance Review Canvas that will be used for the Review. This needs to have been set up prior to creating the Performance Review.
Workflow: select the Performance Cycle/Workflow. This needs to have been set up prior to creating the Performance Review.
Copy From Previous Review: you can choose to copy Skills and/or Behaviours from a previous review. Note that Goals from previous Reviews and Ad Hoc that have not yet been completed are copied over by default.
Review Cycle Scope:
- Employees: allows the User to specify which Employee/s (all, or selected) the Review will be sent to as part of the Review Cycle.
- Groups: allows the User to specify which Group/s the Review will be sent to as part of the Review Cycle.
- Departments: allows the User to specify which Department/s the Review will be sent to as part of the Review Cycle.

8. People & Culture Users can remove the Cycle method by clicking on "Stop Review Process." Confirmation will appear allowing you to cancel, or the User can click "OK" to remove the method.

NOTES:
1. If the Review Type (Cycles or Start based) is stopped and/or changed, any active Review/Cycles will remain active until all participants have completed that Review/Cycle.
2. The System only allows each Employee to have one active Performance Review/Cycle assigned to them at any given time.
4. If changing from a Cycles to Start Date based Cycle ‘Type’ – if an Employee still has a live Review/Cycle assigned to them at the date when their start date anniversary is reached, then they will not be assigned a Start Date Review/Cycle until their next Start Date (only after completion of the previously active Review/Cycle).
5. If a Review Type is cancelled and/or changed, it is recommended that the Review/Cycle is also cancelled (so that the new Review Type and any associated Review/Cycle is assigned to nominated Employees straight away.
6. If the Review Type and the Review/Cycle are not both cancelled at the same time, then point #3 above applies.

People & Culture - Performance Management Widget – Review Cycle Wizard for Start Date based Performance Reviews

How to use the Performance Review Cycle Wizard for ‘Start Date’ based Performance Reviews:
1. Click onto "Select Review Process" button which is located on the top right corner of the Performance Management Widget. If a Review Cycle is already in progress, you will instead see a red "Stop Review Process" button which enables you to stop the current Review Process being used and select another option by following the instructions below.
2. A popup will appear prompting you to select from a dropdown the Review type. Select "Based on Start Date."
3. Click "Submit."
4. The System will take you back to the Performance Management Widget. "Current Review Method = (Start Date)" with a green "On" status will displayed on the top right of the Widget. NOTE: you must click "On" again, which will open another popup, and then select "Activate" to activate that Review Cycle type (this step must be completed for the remainder of the process to work).
5. To create a 'Start Date' based Performance Review, click on "Create Review."
6. You will then be prompted to enter details for the Review. This includes:

Name: the name of the Performance Review.
Template: select the Performance Review Canvas that will be used as the main form for the Review. This needs to have been set up prior to creating the Performance Review.
Workflow: select the Performance Cycle definition. This needs to have been set up prior to creating the Performance Review.
Copy From Previous Review: you can choose to copy Skills and/or Behaviours from a previous review. Note that Goals from previous Reviews and Ad Hoc that have not yet been completed are copied over by default.

7. When complete, click "Activate" or "Delete" to remove the 'Start Date' method.
8. You can click "Stop Review Process" to remove the 'Start Date' method. Confirmation will appear allowing you to cancel or proceed.

NOTES:
1. If the Review Type (Cycles or Start based) is stopped and/or changed, any active Review/Cycles will remain active until all participants have completed that Review/Cycle.
2. The System only allows each Employee to have one active Performance Review/Cycle assigned to them at any given time.
3. If changing from a Cycles to Start Date based Cycle ‘Type’ – if an Employee still has a live Review/Cycle assigned to them at the date when their start date anniversary is reached, then they will not be assigned a Start Date Review/Cycle until their next Start Date (only after completion of the previously active Review/Cycle).
4. If a Review Type is cancelled and/or changed, it is recommended that the Review/Cycle is also cancelled (so that the new Review Type and any associated Review/Cycle is assigned to nominated Employees straight away.
5. If the Review Type and the Review/Cycle are not both cancelled at the same time, then point #3 above applies.

People & Culture - Performance Management Widget – + Create New Wizard

The "Create Review" (Start Date based Reviews) or "Send Review" (Cycles based Reviews) button/s (which are located on the top right-hand corner of the Performance Management widget) starts the process of creating a new Performance Review. This will open the Performance Review Wizard, which allows People & Culture Users to create Performance Reviews based on the Review type selected (Cycles Versus Start Date) and send those Reviews to Employees.

For Cycles Based Reviews input the following information:
1. Name: name the Performance Review.
2. Template: click in the Template field (or start typing) to trigger the menu of Performance Reviews currently available in the System. Select the Performance Canvas/Review that will be used for this Performance Review.
3. Workflow: click in the Workflow field (or start typing) to trigger the menu of Performance Cycles/Workflows currently available in the System. Select the Performance Cycle/Workflow that will be used for this Performance Review.
4. Copy From Previous Review: Users can choose to copy Skills and/or Behaviours from a previous Review. Note that all Goals that were assigned to the Employee as part of the Goals ‘Define’ Step in any previous Review, or that have been created ‘Ad Hoc’ (since/after the ‘Define’ Step was completed) are copied over/included by default. An Employee’s Goals that have already been completed will not be included, but can be added back into an assessment/rating/s Step if needed. Values, if set up in the System, will also be included in the assessment/ratings Step automatically.
5. Select Recipients – specify which Employee/s, Group/s, or Department/s you want to send the Performance Review to. The options available are:

Employee/s: click in the Employees field (or start typing) to trigger the menu of Employees. Select the Employee/s (all, one or multiple) who will be sent this Performance Review.
Group/s: Select the Group/s (one or multiple) that will be sent this Performance Review.
Department/s: Select the Department/s (one or multiple) that will be sent this Performance Review.

6. Sample PDF in the bottom left-hand corner of the popup window, there is a red button “Sample PDF.” Please download a copy of the Sample PDF and check it to confirm that it contains all the information you want to include in your Performance Review. If there is anything missing, repeat previous steps. If the Sample PDF is accurate/complete, ‘tick’ the “I have checked the sample PDF template” checkbox.
7. When to Send: click on the downwards pointing arrow (right-hand side of the popup window) to open the dropdown list. Choose between sending ‘Now’ or ‘Later.’
8. Send Date: if you select ‘Later,’ a date field will appear. Click on the calendar on the far right and specify the date and time you want to trigger the send of the Performance Review.
9. Frequency: Choose between sending ‘Once’ or ‘Indefinite.’ 'Indefinite‘ will repeatedly send the Review on the anniversary of the initial send date unless/until cancelled.
10. Upon Submission, all Employees, Groups or Departments nominated will then be sent that Review based on the ‘When to Send’ (‘Now’ or date) specified.

For Start Date Based Reviews input the following information:
1. Name: name the Performance Review.
2. Template: click in the Template field (or start typing) to trigger the menu of Performance Reviews currently available in the System. Select the Performance Canvas/Review that will be used for this Performance Review.
3. Workflow: click in the Workflow field (or start typing) to trigger the menu of Performance Cycles/Workflows currently available in the System. Select the Performance Cycle/Workflow that will be used for this Performance Review.
4. Copy From Previous Review: Users can choose to copy Skills and/or Behaviours from a previous Review. Note that all Goals that were assigned to the Employee as part of the Goals ‘Define’ Step in any previous Review, or that have been created ‘Ad Hoc’ (since/after the ‘Define’ Step was completed) are copied over/included by default. An Employee’s Goals that have already been completed will not be included, but can be added back into an assessment/rating/s Step if needed. Values, if set up in the System, will also be included in the assessment/ratings Step automatically.

Upon Activation, all Employee will then be sent that Review on the anniversary of their Start Date with your Organisation.

People & Culture - Performance Management Widget – Goals Tab: + Create Goal Wizard

People & Culture Users, Managers and Employees can create 'Ad Hoc' Goals (outside of a Performance Review Cycle). Goals created/assigned as part of a Performance Review Cycle will appear in and be assessable as part of the Review Cycle in which they were created. Ad Hoc Goals will be included in any subsequent Performance Review Cycles (assuming that Goals are Defined/Assessed (rated) as part of the Performance Review). Managers can create ‘Ad Hoc’ Goals for their direct reports throughout the year. These Goals will appear in the ‘Goals’ Step of subsequent Review Cycles/Performance Reviews for the Employee to whom the Goal was assigned (if there is a ‘Define Goals’ or ‘Ratings’ Step included). People & Culture Users can create ‘Ad Hoc’ Objectives/Goals for all Employees throughout the year. These Objectives/Goals will appear in the ‘Goals’ Step of subsequent Review Cycles/Performance Reviews for the Employee to whom the Goal was assigned (if there is a ‘Define Goals’ or ‘Ratings’ Step included). Note: if a Goal is assigned to an Employee, either as part of the ‘Define’ Step in a Review Cycle, or on an ‘Ad Hoc’ basis, and that Goal is ‘completed’ – it will no longer continue to appear in the Goal Define/Rate Step of subsequent Review Cycle Steps. However, it is possible to ‘add’ the Goal back into the Define/Rate Step if required (so that the Employee and/or Manager can rate the Employee’s performance per that Goal). To create a Goal input the following information:
1. Employee: Select the Employee to create the Goal for (if creating it for someone else).
2. Business Objectives: select a Business Objective from the dropdown menu.
3. Goal Type: select the Goal type from the dropdown menu.
4. Goal Name: specify a Goal name.
5. Description: provide a description of the Goal.
6. Target Date of Completion: specify a target date for the completion of the Goal.
7. Goal Completed Date: specify the actual date the Goal was completed/achieved (this can be completed at a future point in time).
8. Notes: add notes regarding the Goal including feedback, process, experience etc. if required. 9. Goal Status: specify the status of the Goal. Click “Next."
10. Summary: the final screen for the Employee Goal Wizard is a summary of all your choices throughout the Wizard. Check and confirm that all the correct information has been captured. If you need to make changes, use “Previous” (bottom right of Wizard) to trace your steps back through the Wizard, and then use “Next” (bottom right of Wizard) to return to the final summary page once all changes have been made. When you’re ready to complete the Goal, click “Submit.”
11. Success: if your Employee Goal Wizard has been submitted correctly, you will see a success message. If not, you will see an error message. If you see an error message, please retrace your steps back through the Wizard and correct any issues. Otherwise, please contact support.

People & Culture - Performance Management Widget – Skills Tab: + Create Skill Wizard

People & Culture Users are the only Users who can create 'Ad Hoc' Skills (outside of a Performance Review Cycle) for Employees. However, if there is a 'Performance Review Cycle' (Cycles or Start Date-based) activated in the System, the '+Create New' option on the Skills Tab of both the Performance Management and the Training Widgets will be deactivated (even for People & Culture Users). Users can only create Skills using one method or the other – as part of the ‘Define step’ of a Performance Review, or ad hoc (not both at the same time). To create a Skill input the following information:
1. Employee: Select the Employee to create the Goal for (Self or Team Member).
2. Skill: select the Skill from the dropdown menu.
3. Assessed by: specify who can validate/has assessed the Skill to be assigned to the Employee.
4. Score: Provide a ‘Score’ for the Skill.
5. Current: confirm if the Skill is current or not.
6. Summary: the final screen for the Employee Skill Wizard is a summary of all your choices throughout the Wizard. Check and confirm that all the correct information has been captured. If you need to make changes, use “Previous” (bottom right of Wizard) to trace your steps back through the Wizard, and then use “Next” (bottom right of Wizard) to return to the final summary page once all changes have been made. When you’re ready to complete the Skill, click “Submit.”
7. Success: if your Employee Skill Wizard has been submitted correctly, you will see a success message. If not, you will see an error message. If you see an error message, please retrace your steps back through the Wizard and correct any issues. Otherwise, please contact support.

NOTE: Ad hoc Skills can’t/won’t be added to a subsequent Performance Review/Cycle (for Rating/Assessment).

People & Culture - Performance Management Widget – Catch-Ups Tab: + Create Catch-Up Wizard

The Catch-Up Wizard allows Users to create a Catch-Up with other Employees in the following ways:

Manager to Employee.
Employee to Manager.
People & Culture to Manager or Employee (essentially all Users).

Field Name	Description
+ Create Catch-Up	People & Culture User can create Catch-Ups with all Employees - between the Employee and P&C User. New Catch Ups can also be created from the Catch Up Wizard which is available via the Wizards "START" menu.
Search	This is a free text field that allows user to filter down the list to specific keywords entered here.
Active Tab	Clicking this Tab will display all currently active Performance Goals. The number in brackets displays the total number of active Goals.
Upcoming Tab	Clicking this Tab will display Catch-Ups that are yet to happen at a future date.
Cancelled Tab	Clicking this Tab will display the Cancelled Catch-Ups. Use the Action: Cancel Reason, to see the reason the Catch-Up was Cancelled.
Completed Tab	Clicking this Tab will display all completed Performance Goals. The number in brackets displays the total number of completed Goals.
Topic	The relevant topic of the Catch Up will be displayed here.
Employee	The name of the Employee that this Catch-Up has been assigned to.
Catch Up Date	The date of the Catch-Up will be displayed here. If the Catch-Up has been rescheduled, Rescheduled from Text and the Date it was rescheduled from will show next to this Date: Time.
Next Catch-up	Select the date of the next Catch-Up if you want to schedule one for the future.
Comments/Notes/Questions	Free type text here.
Attachments	Link attachments here. NOTE: Both participants in the Catch-Up can upload additional attachments (after the initial creation of the Catch-Up) as part of the ongoing Catch-Up 'Conversation').
Actions	This dropdown allows user to perform either of the following: Reply - Use this option to Start the conversation for the Catch Up. Edit - Use this option to Edit the Catch-Up. Complete Catch-Up - Use this option to reply to the conversation. Create Next Catch-Up - Use this option to create a follow-up Catch Up. Reschedule - Use this option to "Reschedule" the Catch-Up. Cancel - Use this option to "Cancel" the Catch Up. Reason for Cancelling is entered. The Reason will then show in the Cancel Tab: Action - Cancel Reason. Cancel Reason - Use this option to "View" the "Cancel Reason".

People & Culture - Performance Management Widget – Reviews Folder

Within the Reviews Folder, there are a series of “Tabs” where HR/P&C Managers can manage the Performance Reviews of Employees. Those Tabs are:

Active.
Completed.
Overdue
Not Started.
New Review.
Review Cycle.

The Reviews Folder contains all Employee Reviews.

Field Name	Description
Current Review Method	This displays the type of Review process currently being used e.g. Review Cycle or Based on Start Date.
+ Send Review	If your Review process is based on Cycle, the green “Send Review” button will enable HR/P&C Managers to create and send Performance Review/s. If your Review process is based on Start Date, the green “Send Review” button will enable HR/P&C Managers to create and send Performance Review/s.
Stop Review Process	The red “Stop Review Process” Button allows HR/P&C Managers to STOP the review process being used (this applies to both Start Date or Cycle Method. Please note that this will complete all Reviews as of that date. Information in the review can be seen up until that date.
Search	This is a free text field that allows user to filter down the list to specific keywords entered here.
Active Tab	Clicking this Tab will display all currently active Performance Reviews. The number in brackets displays the total number of active Reviews.
Completed Tab	Clicking this Tab will display all completed Performance Reviews. The number in brackets displays the total number of completed Reviews.
Overdue Tab	Clicking this Tab will display all Performance Reviews that are incomplete and/or past their due date. The number in brackets displays the total number of overdue Reviews.
Not Started Tab	Clicking this Tab will display all Performance Reviews that have not been started by the Employee.
No Review Tab (Only Relevant to Cycle – Review Cycle)	Clicking this Tab will display all Employees who currently have no Performance Review assigned to them. The number in brackets displays the total number of Employees with no current Reviews.
Review Cycle Tab	Clicking this will display all Performance Workflows that have been created. The number in brackets displays the total number of Workflows that have been created and sent to Employees.
Search	This is a free text field that allows user to filter down the list to specific keywords entered here.
ID	This is the ID of the Performance Review that has been sent to the Employee.
Review Name	The name of the Performance Review will be displayed here.
Employee	The name of the Employee that this Performance Review has been assigned to.
Current Step	The current step of the Performance Review process that Employee is currently at will be displayed here. Clicking on the name of the 'Step' will display an outline of all the steps in the Review Cycle. If the current step is a Peer Review step, another link will appear here that, when clicked, will show the status of each individual Peer (indicating whether the Peer has completed the Step or not).
View Status	Click on “View Status” in this column and a window will open that displays which part of the Performance Workflow the Review is at, e.g. with Employee with Manager etc. and the Due Date of the Review.
Start Date	The date the Performance Review/Workflow was sent/triggered.
End Date	The due date of the of the Performance Review.
Progress	The percentage bar here represents the progress of the Review starting from 0% (not started) to 100% (complete)
Department	The Department of an Employee sent a Review.
Participants	The Participants to which that Review has been sent.
Cycle	The name of the Review that was sent to Participants/Employees.
Scheduled Date	The date the Review was created and sent.
Frequency	The frequency with which the review is sent - quarterly, semi-annually, annually (or other).
Status	Indicates if the Review Cycle is complete, cancelled, in progress etc.
Action	The options are: Open Review: Allows Users to open and complete the current performance step (if the current Step is assigned to them. If the current Step is assigned to someone else/the other respondent in the Performance Review Cycle Step, then the User will see a message that says ‘You do not have permissions to access this Step.’ If you see this message it means that the current Step in the Review Cycle belongs to the other participant and only they can complete the next Step. Reopen Step: Only applies if/when both Manager & Employee are completing a step concurrently, and/or if multiple Peers are completing a step concurrently. Only tasks, which have already been completed on a currently/still open (as in not yet ‘completed’) Step, can be reopened. If a Step has been completed by all participants, it can no longer be reopened. Reopening a Step will display a popup with responder names. Simply tick the relevant step for the relevant responder. Change Step Opening Date: Allows Users to change the opening date of the next Step in the Review Cycle, if that date is in the future. Extend Review Due Date: if the 'Due In' period for the current step has expired, this option can be used to move the expiry forward (in the future) so that the Step reopens and can be completed by the User for whom the Step was locked because the 'Due Date' was passed. View Review Report: Allows Users to view the Performance Review Report for that Employee only. This Report displays the Average Scores for each of the options rated (Skills, Values, Goals, Behaviours – if included in the Review Cycle) and the overall Performance Review Score in both draft/final versions for an individual Employee only. The System does not generate a Report that includes the Averages and the Overall Performance Review Score for all Employees in a single consolidated view. Managers can see Reports for their own direct reports. People & Culture Users can see individual Reports for all Employees. Note: The individual Reports can take up to 24 hours to generate results. If the Report is still in the process of being generated, you will see a message advising you that this is the case. The consolidated Report (that contains the results for all Employees who are completing the Performance Review) can also take up to 24 hours to generate results. If the Report is still in the process of being generated, you will see a message advising you that this is the case. Manage Peers: Allows Users to manage Peers if there is a "Define Step - Peers" and the Review is not yet completed. +Create Review (No Review Tab): This option will be available if the active review method is 'Cycles' based. Selecting this ‘Action’ for an Employee will send a Performance Review Cycle to a single User. To send a Review to an individual Employee – first tick the check box to the left of the Employee’s name. Cancel Review (Cycle Tab): Cancels the selected Performance Review Cycle (and all associated canvases/forms sent to Employees as part of that Review Cycle). Send Comms (Cycle Tab): Sends communications to all participants regarding this Review Cycle. View Reporting (Cycle Tab): View summary/overall reporting for this specific Performance Review Cycle. When you choose this action, you have the option to select/view the summary/overall results for each of the canvases in that specific Performance Review Cycle. This step detects canvases that have question types and assessment scores for Skills, Values, Goals and Behaviours. It will only display those Results types.

People & Culture - Performance Management – Advanced Performance Management Reports

The following Advanced Reports are available as ‘Standard’ in Subscribe-HR:
1. Skills Audit by Department: Showing Employee Skills by Department and the latest Review Score. Self and Manager assessment. Based on the most recent/last Performance Review.
2. Goals Audit by Department: Showing Employee Skills by Department and the latest Review Score. Self and Manager. Based on the most recent/last Performance Review.
Values Audit by Department: Showing Employee Skills by Department and the latest Review Score. Self and Manager assessment. Based on the most recent/last Performance Review.
3. Behaviour Audit by Department: Showing Employee Skills by Department and the latest Review Score. Self and Manager assessment. Based on the most recent/last Performance Review.
4. Skills Final Score by Department: Showing the Average of Self and Manager Rating. Final Score per person by department. Based on the most recent/last Performance Review.
5. Goals Final Score by Department: Showing the Average of Self and Manager Rating. Final Score per person by department. Based on the most recent/last Performance Review.
6. Values Final Score by Department: Showing the Average of Self and Manager Rating. Final Score per person by department. Based on the most recent/last Performance Review.
7. Behaviours Final Score by Department: Showing the Average of Self and Manager Rating. Final Score per person by department. Based on the most recent/last Performance Review.
7. Final Score by Department: Showing average of skills goals values and behaviours – Final Score for all.

People & Culture - Performance Management Widget – Review Cycle Consolidated Reports

Consolidated Reports for each Performance Review/Cycle are available via the Performance Management Widget > Reviews Tab > Cycle Subtab > Action > View Reporting. These Reports contain:

Results Tab: For Goals, Skills, Behaviours, and Values, the average Score entered for each assessable item by each type of Responder (Employee, Manager, Peer); for multiselect questions, the number of times each possible answer was selected by each type of Responder.
Text Tab: Responses to all text-based questions included in the Review.
Score Tab: The average of each participating Employee’s average Score for each assessable category and of their Overall Performance Scores.

People & Culture - Performance Management Widget – Individual Summary Reports

Individual Reports for each Employee’s Performance Review/Cycle are available via the Performance Management Widget > Reviews Tab >Active/Completed Subtab > Action > View Review Report. These Reports contain:

Results Tab: Scores for each of the Skills, Values, Goals and Behaviours assessed in the Review.
Text Tab: Responses to all text-based questions included in the Review.
Score Tab: Average Scores for each of the Skills, Values, Goals and Behaviours assessed in the Review, plus the Overall Performance Score.

People & Culture - Performance Management Widget – Goals Folder

Within the Goals Folder, there are a series of “Tabs” where HR/People & Culture Managers can manage the Goals of Employees. Those Tabs are:

Not Started.
On Track.
Behind.
At Risk.
Completed.
All.

The definitions for these statuses are:

On Track: This is the default status.
Behind: Overall progress is less than 60% complete.
At Risk: Overall progress is less than 25% complete with 30 days remaining.
Completed: Overall goal progress is 100%.

The Goals Folder contains all Employee Goals. New Goals can also be entered without using a Review Cycle. If your Performance Workflow Cycle includes a “Goals Define” step, you can create the Goals within the Review Process or directly from this Tab using "Create Goal.” If you have a PDP step in your Performance Workflow Cycle, Goals which are created as part of the Review process can be linked to the PDP. They will show up in this Widget as having a relationship. If you are using a PDP step in the Review Cycle, and you enter a Goal through the Widget, you can link this Goal to the PDP and create Training Intervention. Completed Goals can also be brought into a current Goal Define step to be used again in a Review.

Field Name	Description
+ Create Goal	The “Create Goal” Wizard allows HR/P&C Managers to create Goals for all Employees. New Goals can also be created from the Employee Goal Wizard (coming soon) which is available via the Wizards "START" menu. Business Objectives can be entered against Goals
Search	This is a free text field that allows user to filter down the list to specific keywords entered here.
Not Started Tab	Clicking this Tab will display all currently active Performance Goals that have not yet been started by the Employee they've been assigned to. The number in brackets displays the total number of active Goals.
On Track Tab	Clicking this Tab will display all Performance Goals that are 'On Track' for completion by the Due Date. The number in brackets displays the total number of On Track Goals.
Behind Tab	Clicking this Tab will display all Performance Goals that are 'Behind' for completion by the Due Date. The number in brackets displays the total number of Behind Goals.
At Risk Tab	Clicking this Tab will display all Performance Goals that are 'At Risk' of not being completed by the Due Date. The number in brackets displays the total number of At Risk Goals.
Completed Tab	Clicking this Tab will display all Performance Goals that have been 'Completed.' The number in brackets displays the total number of Completed Goals.
All Tab	Clicking this Tab will display all Performance Goals, including their Status. The number in brackets displays the total number of Performance Goals currently assigned to Employees. The All Tab also contains a filter that allows Users to filter Goals based on their Status.
Employee	The name of the Employee that this Goal has been assigned to.
Business Objective	The Name of the Business Objective
Goal Name	The Name of the Goal.
PDP	The related Performance Development Plan in which this Goal was create will be displayed here (if/when relevant). This will show the current PDP including current GOALS. You can update the status of the Goals by using the Update Status button. Click the "View Performance Widget", button to be taken to the Performance Widget - Full: Maximized View. Click Export PDF to export a PDF version of the data. The Employee and Manager have the ability to send a Summary on Weekly, Fortnightly or Monthly basis. The summary function will work within the Period of the PDP. To Cancel the Summary, Press Cancel. If you are an Employee you can choose to send a Summary to yourself and or your Manager. If the send summary is not on, it will say "Send Summary - Off". Goals can only be linked to a PDP, through the PDP step or through the Performance Review if a Performance Review / Cycle is Active. PDP can only be used if there is a PDP Step in the Performance Cycle - Review process. E-mail notifications for Reminders will be sent to the Subscribe-HR inbox and e-mail. Recipients can click on the URL to view the PDP in Subscribe-HR. NOTE the e-mails sent are system e-mails not workflow e-mails. Only S-HR developers can use manage these.
Review	If a Review Cycle us being used, when the Goal is created, it will show the relationship to the Review it was created for.
Status	The status of the Goal will display here. This can beNot Start, On Track, Behind, At Risk or Completed..
Due Date	The Goal's due date will be displayed here.
Target Completion Date	The Date the Goal is supposed to be completed.
Enable Reminder	Select this to be able to send a reminder based on the Target Completion Date.
Target Date Completion Reminder (Mandatory)	You can select one or multiple of: 1, 2, 7, 14, 30 Days before the reminder date arrives. Pre-defined e-mail templates will send based on these triggers.
Target Date Completion Recipients (Mandatory)	Manager and or Employee can select to send to Manager and or Employee.
Description	Notes field for the Description of the Goal.
Notes	This is a field for making notes.
Action	This dropdown will allow Managers to view and edit Employee Goals. Update Status Action can be used to update the Goal Status. The options are: View - allows the user to View the Goal. Edit - allows the user to Edit the Goal. Update Status - allows the user to update the Status the Goal.

People & Culture - Performance Management Widget – Catch Ups Folder

Within the Catch Ups Folder, there are a series of “Tabs” where HR/P&C Managers can manage Catch Ups for Employees. Those Tabs are:

Active.
Upcoming.
Completed.

The Catch Ups Folder contains all Employee Catch Ups. Catch Ups can be added as a Step in a Cycle/Review or as an Ad Hoc Catch Up.

Field Name	Description
+ Create Catch Up	Allows HR/P&C Managers to create Catch Ups for all Employees. New Catch Ups can also be created from the Catch Up Wizard (coming soon) which is available via the Wizards "START" menu.
Search	This is a free text field that allows user to filter down the list to specific keywords entered here.
Active Tab	Clicking this Tab will display all currently active Performance Goals. The number in brackets displays the total number of active Goals.
Upcoming Tab	Clicking this Tab will display Catch-ups that are yet to happen at a future date.
Completed Tab	Clicking this Tab will display all completed Performance Goals. The number in brackets displays the total number of completed Goals.
Topic	The relevant topic of the Catch Up will be displayed here.
Employee	The name of the Employee that this Catch Up has been assigned to.
Catch Up Date	The date of the Catch Up will be displayed here.
Comments/Notes/Questions	Free type text here.
Attachments	Link attachments here. NOTE: Both participants in the Catch-Up can upload additional attachments (after the initial creation of the Catch-Up) as part of the ongoing Catch-Up 'Conversation').
Actions	This dropdown allows user to perform either of the following: Reply - Use this option to Start the conversation for the Catch Up. Complete Catch Up - Use this option to reply to the conversation. Create Next Catch-up - Use this option to create a follow-up Catch Up.

People & Culture - Performance Management Widget – Acknowledgements Folder

The Acknowledgements Folder contains all Acknowledgements that have been sent to Employees, Locations, or Departments. People & Culture Users can see Acknowledgements for the entire organisation. Users can also create new Acknowledgements from this Tab on the Performance Management Widget, via '+Create Acknowledgement' on the 'Acknowledgements' Tab in the Announcements & Acknowledgements Widget, or by triggering the Acknowledgement Wizard via the ‘START’ menu.

Field Name	Description
+ Create Acknowledgement	Top Right of the Widget. Starts the New Acknowledgement Wizard, for you to be able to create a new acknowledgement. This is also available from the "START" options
Search Keyword	This is a free text field that you can use to search Announcements based on keywords you enter in the search field.
All Received Sub-Folder	Contains acknowledgements sent to/received by the Employee.
All Sent Sub-Folder	Contains acknowledgements sent by Employees.
Create Date	This is the date and time the Acknowledgement was created.
Title	The Title of the Acknowledgement is displayed here.
Likes	Clicking the "thumbs up" icon will Like the Acknowledgement. The number beside it displays the total number of likes the Acknowledgement has received.
Comments	Clicking the speech bubble icon will allow you to enter in comments related to the Acknowledgement. The number beside it will display the total number of comments made against the Acknowledgement.
Sent To	Employees, locations and/or departments that have been acknowledged will be displayed here.
Sent By	The name of the individual who sent this Acknowledgement will be displayed here.
Actions	Use this dropdown to action the following: Edit - edit an Acknowledgement. Delete - delete an Acknowledgement. View - view an Acknowledgement.

People & Culture - Performance Management Widget – Skills Folder

The Skills Folder contains the current Skills that all Employees have been assessed for during a Performance Review Cycle, or which have been assigned/assessed on an Ad Hoc basis. A 'current' skill is defined as the 'most recent' record of a Skill that has been created/assigned to an Employee. The Employee may have 'previous' records of assignment/assessment for a particular Skill (for example if they were assessed for that Skill in a previous/older Performance Review Cycle). Older versions of Skills are not displayed in the Tab and can be found via the Employee's Skills record in Performance Management.

People & Culture Users are the only Users who can create 'Ad Hoc' Skills (outside of a Performance Review Cycle) for Employees. However, if there is a 'Performance Review Cycle' (Cycles or Start Date-based) activated in the System, the '+Create New' option on the Skills Tab will be deactivated. Users can only create Skills using one method or the other (not both at the same time).

Field Name	Description
+ Create Skill	Top Right of the Widget. Starts the Skill Wizard, and allows the User to select a Skill from the 'Skills Library' and assign it to an Employee.
Search Keyword	This is a free text field that you can use to search the Skill s Tab for an Employee name, or for a Skill Type.
Current Sub-Tab	Displays the Skills that the Employee was assigned/assessed for during the current/most recent Performance Review Cycle.
Gaps Sub-Tab	Displays the Employees that have Gaps in their Skills (in relation to the Skills required for the Job they hold).
Employee Name	The name of the Employee that the Skill (or Skills Gap) relates to.
Skill Name	The name of the Skill assigned to/for which the Employee was assessed.
Skill Gap	The name of the Skill the Employee has a Gap for (in relation to the Job they hold).
Required for the Job	The name of the Job the Skill is required for.
Date Created	Displays the Date that the Skill was assigned to the Employee for assessment. Or, if the Skill was created Ad Hoc by a People & culture User (not via a Performance Review Cycle), the date the Skill was created/assigned to the Employee.
Linked Cycle	If the Skill was assigned to an Employee and assessed by the Employee/Manager as part of a Performance Review Cycle - a link to the most recent/current Performance Review Cycle will appear here. There will be a record for the Skill assessed by the Employee, and another for that Skill assessed by their Manager.
Score	Displays the Score that the Assessor gave to the Employee for that Skill Type.
Date Created	Displays the date that the Skill record wa created.
Assessed By	The name of the Individual who created/assessed the Employee for that Skill Type.
Date Assessed	Displays the Date that the Skill was assigned to the Employee and assessed (as part of a Performance Review Cycle).
Current	Specifies if the Skill is current (Yes) or not (No).
Actions	Use this dropdown to action the following: Edit - edit a Skill. Delete - delete a Skill. View - view a Skill. Add Employee to Course Waiting List - allows the User to add the Employee to the Course Waiting list so that they are then enrolled when an internal Training Event for that Course type is next scheduled. Add Employee to Event Waiting List - allows the User to add the Employee to an Event Waiting when a Course is scheduled. Create Training Record - allows the User to a Training Record for that Employee.

People & Culture - Timesheets Management Widget

This widget display information regarding all timesheets related to the logged-in HR/People & Culture Manager.

Submitting requests for Timesheets works as follows:

System Administrators and People & Culture Users can create/submit/apply for Timesheets for all Users.
- To do so, the User must be on the People & Culture Dashboard (and can then use the Timesheet Wizard vis the 'Start' Wizard menu, or via the Timesheet Wizard that is accessible via the Timesheet Widget on the People & Culture Dashboard).
Managers can submit Timesheets on behalf of their direct reports only (such Managers need to have 'Line Manager' User Group assigned, they have to be set in the System as a 'Manager,' and specified as the Employee's Manager to be able to do this). Other Line Managers can't submit Timesheets on behalf of Employees for whom they are not the specified/assigned Manager. Only one Manager can/has the capacity to do this.
- To do so, the User must be on the Manager Dashboard (and can then use the Timesheet Wizard vis the 'Start' Wizard menu, or via the Timesheet Wizard that is accessible via the Timesheet Widget on the Manager Dashboard).

Field Name	Description
In Progress Tab	Displays all saved but not submitted timesheets. The number in brackets indicates the total number of "In Progress" Timesheets (currently being worked on, but not yet submitted for authorisation).
Requested Tab	Displays all Timesheets that have been submitted but are have yet to be authorised/rejected. The number in brackets indicates the total number of Timesheets requiring authorisation.
Authorised Tab	Displays all Timesheets that have been authorised by the authoriser. The number in brackets indicates the total number of Authorised timesheets.
Rejected Tab	Displays all Timesheets that have been rejected by the authoriser. Rejected Timesheets can not be edited and resubmitted, however, if/when a new Timesheet is started (after one has been rejected), the new Timesheet will pick up/include the entries from the most recently saved/submitted Timesheet (the rejected one). If a new Timsheet is submitted after the rejection of a previously submitted Timesheet - that Timesheet record will disappear from the 'Rejected' subtab (however, there will be a record of it in the 'Workflow History' (via the System Inbox or the Tasks & Notifications Widget). The newly created/submitted Timesheet will then appear on the 'Requested' subtab. The number in brackets indicates the total number of Rejected Timesheets.
Resubmit Tab	Displays all Timesheets that have been cancelled. Cancelled Timesheets can be edited and resubmitted. The number in brackets indicates the total number of cancelled Timesheets.
+ Create Timesheet	Clicking this button will allow users to quickly create a timesheet through the New Timesheet Wizard. P&C user can "Create" and "Submit" a Timesheet for any Employee.
Search by name	This is a free text field which allows you to specifically search for timesheets by employee name.
Name	Employee name will appear under here.
Period	Duration of Timesheet/Pay period will display here in DD/MM/YYY - DD/MM/YYYY format. Depending on the 'Timesheet Settings' in the Core-HR Widget on the Activation Hub, this will either be: Weekly. Fortnightly.
Submitted Date	The date the timesheet was submitted will appear under here.
Total Hours	Total number of hours recorded within the timesheet will appear under here.
Authoriser	The name of the timesheet's authoriser will appear here as a hyperlink. Clicking the link will open a popup window that displays the Timesheet history, including: The Employee who submitted the Timesheet (including a date and time stamp). The Manager to whom the Timesheet is originally sent for Authorisation. A list of People & Culture Users who also have permission to Authorise the Timesheet. If the Timesheet has been forwarded to a second (third, or more) Authoriser, that list will appear here (including a date and time stamp). If the Timesheet is forwarded, then the name of the Authoriser in this column will update to reflect the Authoriser that the Timesheet is currently with until the final Authoriser completes the process. Once completed, the name will revert to the original Manager that the Timesheet was sent to. NOTES: Upon submission, the Timesheet Authorisation request is sent to: The Employee's Manager. People & Culture Users. The Authorisation request will appear in both the Inbox and Tasks & Notifications Widget of the Authorisers. It will also appear on the 'Requested' subtab of the Timesheets Widget on either their Manager or People & Culture Dashboard. Unless/until the Timesheet is 'Forwarded' - it can be authorised by either the Manager or any of the People & Culture Users if (for example) the Manager to whom it was submitted is absent. If the Timesheet is Authorised (without being forwarded) it will then move to the 'Authorised' subtab of the Timesheets Widget. If the Timesheet is Rejected (without being forwarded) - a copy of that original Timesheet will appear on the 'Rejected' subtab of the Timesheets Widget. When a new Timesheet is created for that Employee, the hours submitted in the rejected timesheet will be picked up in the new Timesheet and the Employee will need to update these fields as necessary. The Employee, the Employee's Manager and all People & Culture Users will be able to see the Timesheet's progress under the relevant subtabs in the Timesheets Widget on their relevant Dashboard. If the Timesheet is forwarded (for Authorisation by multiple Users/Authorisers): From the point of the first forward, the Timesheet is locked and only the Employee (Manager or People & Culture user) to whom it was sent (forwarded) can then either Authorise/Reject/Forward the Timesheet. Other People & Culture Users can no longer Authorise the Timesheet from this point forward. If an Authoriser is absent for any reason - the Timesheet should not be forwarded to that Employee (no one else will be able to Authorise the Timesheet in their absence unless that Employee set up a 'Delegation' prior to the submission of the Timesheet for Authorisation). The delegation (created by an absent Employee) will only work if the Employee delegated to is a Manager or People & Culture User (only Employees with these User Groups assigned can Authorise Timesheets). Employees with Self-Service User Group access only will not be able to Authorise a Timesheet if a delegation has been set up to go to them. See 'Actions - Authorise' below for more information about how 'Forwarding' works or refer to the Timesheet Wizard.
Actions	This dropdown allows user to perform either of the following: View - View the timesheet. Edit - Edit the timesheet (Timesheets can only be edited prior to submission, or post cancellation. If a Timesheet has been submitted for authorisation (and not cancelled/rejected) it is locked and can't be edited). Edit & Resubmit - Edit the timesheet and resubmit it (Timesheets can only be edited and resubmitted via the 'Resubmit' subtab (post-cancellation). If a Timesheet has been submitted for Authorisation (and not cancelled/rejected) it is locked and can't be edited. Cancel - Cancel the Timesheet (cancelled Timesheets will appear under the 'Resubmit' subtab and can be edited and resubmitted). Authorise/Reject/Forward - Authorise, Reject or Forward the Timesheet. NOTES: Users can include multiple Employees in the Authorisation process. The original recipient of the Authorisation request has the option to 'Authorise,' 'Reject' or 'Forward' the Authorisation. If Authorised, the request is completed. If Rejected, the request is completed. If forwarded, it is assumed that the forwarding Employee has given their Authorisation for that request and is forwarding the request on to the next Authoriser. This process can be done multiple times. When Forwarded, the request isn't completed/fully Authorised until the an Employee (the most senior or final in the process) selects 'Authorise.' This completes the Authorisation process. A history of all Employees with a date and time stamps is added to the Authorisation request each time it is forwarded, so that all previous Authorisations can be seen by the subsequent Employee. A record of all Actions taken are also recorded in the WIP (on the Tasks & Notifications Widget or in the System Inbox). Timesheets that have been started but not submitted, or submitted for approval, but not yet ‘Authorised’ can be 'Cancelled' via the 'In Progress' or 'Submitted' Tabs in the Timesheets Widget. Once the Timesheet has been ‘Authorised,‘ must be 'Cancelled' via the Authorised Tab in the Timesheets Widget. The 'Cancellation' of an 'Authorised' Timesheet can only be done by a People & Culture User/System Administrator via the Timesheets Widget on the People & Culture Dashboard (this action can't be taken on the Manager or My Info Dashboards). For more information about Timesheets Cancellation, see the Timesheets Wizard Wiki page. Only a Timesheet cancelled prior to 'Authorisation' can be 'edited and resubmitted.' For Timesheets cancelled prior to Authorisation, the data from the previously submitted Timeshseet will appear. Timesheets cancelled post Authorisation will need to be started again (no data from the previously submitted/authorised/cancelled Timesheet will appear). Not all Payroll solution APIs enable/facilitate the export and update of the Timesheets Authorisation in Payroll once an 'Authorised' record has been created/exported. For Payroll solutions that do enable the export of the 'Cancellation' of a Timesheet - this will update/cancel the Timesheet in Payroll. Please check with Support or your Project Manager to find out if your Payroll solution enables the export of 'Cancelled' Timesheets post Authorisation. If not, then the Timesheet will need to be updated in both Subscribe-HR and Payroll manually. The configuration of each Payroll API/integration (and therefore how Timesheets configuration and export settings behave in each Payroll integration) is different. Some Authorised Timesheets will transfer straight away. Some Payroll solutions/APIs make it possible to time it so that Timesheets are only transferred from Subscribe-HR to Payroll right before the pay run. Please check with Support or your Project Manager to confirm the behaviour for your organisation’s Payroll solution. Export to CSV - Export the timesheet into a CSV file.

People & Culture - Time Off Management Widget

This Widget displays information regarding absence requests related to the logged-in HR/People & Culture Manager and their team.

Submitting requests for Time Off/Leave works as follows:

System Administrators and People & Culture Users can create/submit/apply for Time Off/Leave for all Users.
- To do so, the User must be on the People & Culture Dashboard (and can then use the Time Off Wizard vis the 'Start' Wizard menu, or via the Time Off Wizard that is accessible via the Time Off Widget on the People & Culture Dashboard).
Managers can apply for Time Off/Leave on behalf of their direct reports only (such Managers need to have 'Line Manager' User Group assigned, they have to be set in the System as a 'Manager,' and specified as the Employee's Manager to be able to do this). Other Line Managers can't apply for Time Off/Leave on behalf of Employees for whom they are not the specified/assigned Manager. Only one Manager can/has the capacity to do this.
- To do so, the User must be on the Manager Dashboard (and can then use the Time Off Wizard vis the 'Start' Wizard menu, or via the Time Off Wizard that is accessible via the Time Off Widget on the Manager Dashboard).

Field Name	Description
+ Create Time Off	Logged in employee will be able to create an absence request. Clicking this will take them through the Time Off Wizard.
Requested Tab	Displays all absence requests that have been submitted but are have yet to be authorised/rejected. Number in brackets outline the total number of pending requests.
Authorised Tab	Displays all absences requests that have been authorised by the authoriser. Number in brackets outline the total number of Authorised absence requests.
Rejected Tab	Displays all absence requests that have been rejected by the authoriser. Number in brackets outline the total number of Rejected absence requests.
Cancelled Tab	Displays all absences requests that have been cancelled. Number in brackets outline the total number of cancelled absence requests.
Search Team Member	This is a free text field which allows you to specifically search for absence requested by employee name.
Employee Name	Employee's full name will appear under here.
Requested Date	Date the request was made will display here in DD/MM/YYYY format.
From Date	The date the absence begins will display here in DD/MM/YYYY format.
Until Date	The date the absence ends will display here in DD/MM/YYYY format.
Absence Type	E.g. Sick - Personal Carers, LSL, Annual. If Personal (Sick Leave): You can attach a Doctors Certificate or Self Certify. If Personal (Carer's Leave): You can record Illness and also link a Dependent.
Days/Hours	This will outline whether the employee has taken the whole day off or part of the day off.
Authoriser	The name of the absence request's authoriser will appear here.
Actions	This dropdown allows user to perform either of the following: View - view the request. Cancel - cancels a Time Off request (requests can only be cancelled via the Time Off Widget prior to 'Authorisation'). Authorise/Reject/Forward - Authorise, Reject or Forward the timesheet. NOTES: Users can include multiple Employees in the Authorisation process. The original recipient of the Authorisation request has the option to 'Authorise' or 'Forward' the Authorisation. If Authorised, the request is completed. If forwarded, it is assumed that the forwarding Employee has given their Authorisation for that request and is forwarding the request on tot he next Authoriser. This process can be done multiple times. When forwarded, the request isn't completed/full Authorised until the an Employee (the most senior or final in the process) selects 'Authorise.' This completes the Authorisation process. A history of all Employees with a date and time stamps is added to the Authorisation request each time it is forwarded, so that all previous Authorisations can be seen by the subsequent Employee. Once Time Off requests have been 'Authorised' they can't be 'Rejected' (either via the Widget for via the LHS menu on the Employee's Time Off/Absence record). The only way to 'Cancel' an 'Authorised' Time Off request post Authorisation is via the LHS menu (by changing the status of the individual request in question to 'Cancelled' on the Time Off record via Employees > Absence). Please note that Only System Administrators can cancel 'Cancel' Authorised Time Off requests in this way. It is fair to assume that as soon as the Time Off request is 'Authorised' it will be exported to Payroll (assuming there is a Payroll integration in place). Not all Payroll solution APIs enable/facilitate the export and update (Cancellation) of the Time Off Authorisation in Payroll once an 'Authorised' record has been created/exported. For Payroll solutions that do enable the export of the 'Cancellation' of a Time Off request - this will update/cancel the Time Off request in Payroll. Please check with Support or your Project Manager to find out if your Payroll solution enables the export of 'Cancelled' Time Off requests. If not, then the Time Off request will need to be cancelled in both Subscribe-HR and Payroll manually. View Accruals - view the accrual levels of the related employee. View Team Leaver Planner - access the team leaver planner functionality.

People & Culture – HR Surveys Widget

This Widget allows for HR/People & Culture Managers to View and Action HR Surveys that have been assigned to Employees across the organisation.

Field Name	Description
Employees Tab	This tab displays all Active and Completed HR Surveys.
Active (Under Employees Tab)	Displays all HR Surveys that are currently Active within the System.
Filter	Allows the user to "Filter" items by Tag or Filter: E.g. Human Resources, HR Anonymous etc.
Date dropdown	Allows the user to specify a date range that will then list only HR Surveys that match that date range: E.g. 1 day, 1 week, fortnight, 1 month, 3 months, 6 months, 1 year, custom etc.
+ Create New	Allows the User to create a new HR Survey using the HR Survey Wizard.
Search (Under Employees Tab)	This is a free text field that you can use to search HR Surveys based on keywords you enter in the search field.
Survey (Under Active Tab)	This lists the HR Survey ID number.
Created On (Under Active Tab)	This specifies the date on which that HR Survey type was created.
Canvas Name (Under Active Tab)	This specifies the type of Canvas/Survey that this particular HR Survey is.
Type (Under Active Tab)	This specifies whether the Survey is an Onboarding, HR or Recruitment Survey.
Relates To (Under Active Tab)	This specifies the Employee to whom that HR Survey has been assigned.
Date Started (Under Active Tab)	This specifies the date on which that HR Survey was started by the Employee listed in the previous column.
Date Completed (Under Active Tab)	This specifies the date on which that HR Survey was completed by the Employee.
Actions (Under Active Tab)	This dropdown allows user to perform any/all of the following: Open Canvas - view the Canvas/Survey. Results - View the results of the Canvas/Survey. Resend Link - Resend the Employee a link to that Canvas/Survey.
Completed (Under Employees Tab)	Displays all HR Surveys that have been completed.
Survey (Under Completed Tab)	This lists the HR Survey ID number.
Created On (Under Completed Tab)	This specifies the date on which that HR Survey type was created.
Canvas Name (Under Completed Tab)	This specifies the type of Canvas/Survey that this particular HR Survey is.
Type (Under Completed Tab)	This specifies whether the Survey is an Onboarding, HR or Recruitment Survey.
Relates To (Under Completed Tab)	This specifies the Employee to whom that HR Survey was assigned.
Date Started (Under Completed Tab)	This specifies the date on which that HR Survey was started by the Employee listed in the previous column.
Date Completed (Under Completed Tab)	This specifies the date on which that HR Survey was completed by the Employee.
Actions (Under Completed Tab)	This dropdown allows user to perform any/all of the following: Open Canvas - view the Canvas/Survey. Results - View the results of the Canvas/Survey.
Actions (Under All Tab)	This dropdown allows user to perform any/all of the following: Report - View Summary Report of the Survey. View Summary information based on Jobs, Locations, Departments and Managers. Cancel - Cancels the Whole HR Survey. Survey can't be restarted after it's canceled. If you think you may want to restart a Survey, use the Pause option. Pause - This pauses the Survey. The Survey can be "Restarted". Restart - Use this option to Restart the Survey if you have paused it.

People & Culture – Compliance Management Widget

The Compliance Management Widget allows People and Culture users to view, track and manage Employee compliance in relation to Certificates & Licences, Background Checks and Education & Qualifications. P&C Users can validate (or reject) the records supplied by Applicants during the application process (and transferred to the Employee Record when a New Employee was created from Applicant), as well as creating new records.

This widget allows for Users to quickly and easily manage Employees through the each of the following processes by clicking on the relevant “Folder”:

Certificates & Licences.
Background Checks.
Education & Qualifications.

Depending on which of the above Folders you’re in, “Create New” (top right of the “Compliance Management” Widget) will trigger the Wizard for Certificates & Licences, Background Checks or Education & Qualifications, and enable you to create a new compliance record for the Employee you nominate at the start of that particular Wizard.

Within each of the above Folders, there are a series of “Tabs,” which are:

Expiring.
Expired.
Active.
Pending.
From Applicant.
Failed.

On each of these Tabs, there is a table that contains different columns. The Tabs and Columns are explained below.

The preferred document/file types that can be uploaded in the System for Compliance documentation are:

Word (docx).
Pdf.
Rich Text (rtf).
Png.

Compliance Management Widget – Certificates & Licences Folder

This Folder displays all the Certificates & Licences held by Employees and their current status. It also allows Users to create new and/or validate Certificates & Licences for Employees. If you are using Recruitment, Certificates and Licences can be moved through from the Applicant to Employee. You would use the From Applicant Tab, which is outlined below, to Validate the From Applicant Records. On Validating you can enter an Expiry Date. Certificate and Licences, need to be Mapped to CVCheck items in the CVCheck APP to allow for any current Certificate and Licence Data, in Subscribe-HR to be selected to then run a CVCheck. Without this Mapping the CVCheck option will not appear in the "Action".

Field Name	Description
Search	This is a free text field that allows Users to filter the list based on specific keywords entered here.
Filter	Allows the User to "Filter" Certificates/Licences records by Tag or Filter: E.g. Licence name/type, Certificate name/type.
Date/Timeframe Search	Allows the User to "Filter" Certificates/Licences records based on the timeframes in the dropdown menu, which include: one day, one week, two weeks, one month. When active/a date range search parameter/filter is being applied, the looking glass square will be green.
Expiring Filter	Contains a dropdown list of timeframe filters. The default is set to three months, but Users can also change the view to display what's expiring in different timeframes (up to a year).
Expiring Tab	Displays all the Certificates & Licences that are expiring within the next three months.<
Expired Tab	Displays all the Certificates & Licences that have expired and need renewing.
Active Tab	Displays all the Certificates & Licences that are current (and don’t fall under the other two tabs/categories above).
Pending	This Displays any Certificates and Licences, which have been entered by an Employee, or Manager which need to be Verified before they become Active. Verification is an "Action". If the User "Rejects" the Check, it moves to the "Failed" Tab. If the CVCheck APP is installed, when the CVCheck is sent to CVCheck for New Checks or Renewal Checks, the check will be in Pending, until the results come back and the P&C user either "Activates" or "Rejects". If they Activate, they will be asked to enter an Expiry Date, so that the Check can be placed into Expiring and Expired based on the Expiry Date. The Results are available from the CVCheck list by clicking on the Document Image. Any Check that is not validated will end up in pending.
From Applicant Tab	Displays all the Certificates & Licences that need to be validated by HR to ensure that all Certificates/Licences nominated by the Applicant during the recruitment process are in fact valid. If a CVCheck is done against the Applicant Record, the CVCheck results for that check will flow into From Applicant.
Failed	Any Check that has been "Rejected" will end up in the "Failed" Tab. The is a "Validate" Action against the "Failed" items in the Failed Tab.
ID	This is the ID of the Certificate/Licence.
Employee	The name of the Employee that this Certificate/Licence relates/belongs to is displayed here.
Status	The status of the Certificate/Licence is displayed here.
Checked By	The name of the Employee who validated/rejected the Certificate/Licence is displayed here.
Checked Date	The date on which the Certificate/Licence was validated is displayed here.
Certificate/Licence Name	The name of the Certificate/Licence is displayed here. Users can click on the name and this will open/display the Certificate/Licence in a pop-up/lightbox.
Expiry Date	The date on which the Certificate/Licence expires is displayed here.
Previous	If the current Certificate/Licence has been renewed based on a previously existing Certificate/Licence, the ID of the previous Certificate/Licence record is is displayed here.
Current	If the Certificate/Licence has expired and a new Certificate/Licence record created based on renewing that Certificate/Licence, the ID of the new record is is displayed here.
From Applicant	The name of the Applicant (from which the Employee record was created) that this Certificate/Licence relates/belongs to is displayed here (on the 'From Applicant' Tab only).
Cost	The cost (if any) of the Certificate/Licence is displayed here.
Actions	Create New - allows the User to create a new Certificate/Licence. It is mandatory as part of this step for Users to attach a copy of the Certificate/Licence to validate/keep a record of it. Edit - allows the User to edit the Certificate/Licence. Certificates/Licences can't be edited once they are 'Active.' View - allows the User to view a copy of the Certificate/Licence. Add to Course Waiting List - allows the User to add that Employee to a Course Waiting list to renew or do any extra training required to maintain that Certificate/Licence. Add to Event Waiting List - allows the User to add that Employee to an Event waiting list to renew or do any extra training required to maintain that Certificate/Licence. Training Record – No Event - allows the User to create a ‘One-Off’ Training Record for training activity completed by the Employee. Renew - allows the User to renew the Certificate/Licence. Validate - allows the User to validate the Certificate/Licence of an Applicant/Employee (on the 'From Applicant' Tab only). Reject - allows the User to reject an invalid Certificate/Licence that has been transferred from an Applicant record (on the 'From Applicant' Tab only). Renew CVCheck - This allow for you to Renew the Membership that belongs to the Education and Qualifications Record. This "Action" is available in the Expiry and Expired Tabs. You do this through the Renewal "Action" against the Education and Qualifications Record. It will create a New Education and Qualification Record with the same data as the previous, but it will allow you to update the Membership Expiry. So you are not checking the Education and Qualifications, you are rechecking/renewing the Membership. When you renew the Check, through CVCheck for Membership it will go to Pending, and the P&C user needs to "Validate" or "Reject" it once the results come back.

Compliance Management Widget – Background Checks Folder

This Folder displays all the Background Checks held by Employees and their current status. It also allows Users to create new and/or validate Background Checks for Employees. If using the CVCheck APP, CVCheck Background checks need to be Mapped into the relevant Subscribe-HR folders and fields. So that Applicant and Employees can be used for running Background Checks. This is needed for Employee checks otherwise the "Action" for CVCheck will not Display.

The types of Background checks include:

Visa - VEVO.
Police checks.
Working with Children checks.

Field Name	Description
Search	This is a free text field that allows Users to filter the list based on specific keywords entered here.
+ Create New	Allows the User to create a new Background Check record for an Employee using the Compliance Management Wizard. It is mandatory as part of this step for Users to attach a copy of the Background Check to validate/keep a record of it.
Filter	Allows the User to "Filter" Background Check records by Tag or Filter: E.g. Visa, Police check etc.
Date/Timeframe Search	Allows the User to "Filter" Background Check records based on the timeframes in the dropdown menu, which include: one day, one week, two weeks, one month. When active/a date range search parameter/filter is being applied, the looking glass square will be green.
Expiring Tab	Displays all the Background Checks that are expiring within the next three months.
Expired Tab	Displays all the Background Checks that have expired and need renewing.
Active Tab	Displays all the Background Checks that are current (and don’t fall under the other two tabs/categories above).
Pending Tab	Displays all the Background Checks that need to be conducted/completed. Any New Background Checks that are Created, will flow into Pending. So that they can then be Activated, or Rejected. If a P&C User Enters a Background Check, they still need to Validate it from Pending. Any CVChecks that are done, will go to Pending, and when the results are back, the user can either Validate to send it to Active or Reject it to Fail the Check. Prior to Activation, the Use needs to enter an Expiry Date.
From Applicant Tab	Displays all the Background Checks that need to be validated by HR to ensure that all Background Checks nominated by the Applicant during the recruitment process are in fact valid.
Failed Tab	Displays all the Background Checks that have resulted in a negative/failed result. Use can Validate from this Tab via the Validate "Action".
All Tab	Displays all the Background Checks (from each of the above categories) on one tab.
ID	This is the ID of the Background Check.
Employee	The name of the Employee that this Background Check relates/belongs to is displayed here.
Status	The status of the Background Check is displayed here.
Checked By	The name of the Employee who validated/rejected the Background Check is displayed here.
Check Date	The date the Background Check was passed or failed is displayed here.
Background Check Type	The type of Background Check is displayed here. Users can click on the name and this will open/display the Background Check in a pop-up/lightbox. This needs to be Mapped into the CVCheck APP in the Mapping area.
Expires In	The number of days until the Background Check expires.
Cost	The cost (if any) of the Background Check is displayed here.
Supplier	The organisation or governing body from which the Background Check was sourced is displayed here.
Actions	Create New - allows the User to create a new Background Check. It is mandatory as part of this step for Users to attach a copy of the Background Check to validate/keep a record of it. Edit - allows the User to edit a Background Check. background Checks can't be edited once they are 'Active.' View - allows the User to view the Background Check. Renew - allows the User to renew a Background Check. Validate - allows the User to validate a Background Check. Reject - allows the User to Reject/Fail a Background Check. Renew CVCheck - This allow for you to Renew the Membership that belongs to the Education and Qualifications Record. This "Action" is available in the Expiry and Expired Tabs. You do this through the Renewal "Action" against the Education and Qualifications Record. It will create a New Education and Qualification Record with the same data as the previous, but it will allow you to update the Membership Expiry. So you are not checking the Education and Qualifications, you are rechecking/renewing the Membership. When you renew the Check, through CVCheck for Membership it will go to Pending, and the P&C user needs to "Validate" or "Reject" it once the results come back.

Compliance Management Widget – Education & Qualifications Folder

This Folder displays all the Education & Qualifications held by Employees and their current status. It also allows Users to create new and/or validate Education/Qualifications for Employees. For Employees you can run a Membership Check through CVCheck if the CVCheck APP is installed. You do this through the Renewal "Action" against the Education and Qualifications Record. It will create a New Education and Qualification Record with the same data as the previous, but it will allow you to update the Membership Expiry. So you are not checking the Education and Qualifications, you are rechecking/renewing the Membership.

The types of Education/Qualifications include:

Degrees.
Diplomas.
Certificates.

Field Name	Description
Search	This is a free text field that allows Users to filter the list based on specific keywords entered here.
+ Create New	Allows the User to create a new Education/Qualification record for an Employee using the Compliance Management Wizard.
Filter	Allows the User to "Filter" Education/Qualification records by Tag or Filter: E.g. Degree, Diploma etc.
Date/Timeframe Search	Allows the User to "Filter" Education/Qualification records based on the timeframes in the dropdown menu, which include: one day, one week, two weeks, one month. When active/a date range search parameter/filter is being applied, the looking glass square will be green.
Expiring Tab	Displays all the Memberships related to Education & Qualifications that are expiring within the next three months.
Expired Tab	Displays all the Memberships related to Education & Qualifications that have expired and need renewing.
Active Tab	Displays all the Education/Qualifications that are current and have been validated.
Pending Tab	Displays all the Education/Qualifications records that have been entered into the System and are awaiting validation.
From Applicant Tab	Displays all the Education/Qualifications that need to be validated by HR to ensure that all Education/Qualifications nominated by the Applicant during the recruitment process are in fact valid.
Failed Tab	Displays all the Education/Qualifications that failed to be validated.
ID	This is the ID of the Education/Qualification.
Education/Qualification Name	The name of the Education/Qualification is displayed here. Users can click on the name and this will open/display the Education/Qualification in a pop-up/lightbox.
Education/Qualification Institute	The name of the Institute at which the Education/Qualification was gained is displayed here.
Employee	The name of the Employee that this Education/Qualification relates/belongs to is displayed here.
Status	The status of the Education/Qualification is displayed here.
Checked By	The name of the Employee who validated/rejected the Education/Qualification is displayed here.
Check Date	The date on which the Education/Qualification was validated is displayed here.
Qualification Type	The type of the Education/Qualification is displayed here.
Previous	If there was a previous Education/Qualification, a link to it is displayed here.
Actions	Edit - allows the User to edit a Education/Qualification. Education/Qualifications can't be edited once they are 'Active.' View - allows the User to view the Education/Qualification. Validate - allows the User to validate a Education/Qualification. Reject - allows the User to reject a Education/Qualification. Renew CVCheck - This allow for you to Renew the Membership that belongs to the Education and Qualifications Record. This "Action" is available in the Expiry and Expired Tabs. You do this through the Renewal "Action" against the Education and Qualifications Record. It will create a New Education and Qualification Record with the same data as the previous, but it will allow you to update the Membership Expiry. So you are not checking the Education and Qualifications, you are rechecking/renewing the Membership. When you renew the Check, through CVCheck for Membership it will go to Pending, and the P&C user needs to "Validate" or "Reject" it once the results come back.

People & Culture – WHS Incident Widget

The WHS Incident Widget allows People and Culture users to view, track and manage WHS Incidents to ensure compliance with Work, Health and Safety regulations.

Field Name	Description
Search	This is a free text field that allows Users to filter the list based on specific keywords entered here.
+ Create New	Allows the User to create a new WHS Incident for an Employee using the WHS Incident Wizard.
Active Tab	Displays all the currently active WHS Incidents.
Resolved Tab	Displays all the WHS Incidents that have been resolved.
Filter	Allows the User to "Filter" WHS Incident records by level of importance: E.g. high, medium, low.
Date/Timeframe Search	Allows the User to "Filter" HR Questions based on the timeframes in the dropdown menu, which include: one day, one week, two weeks, one month. When active/a date range search parameter/filter is being applied, the looking glass square will be green.
Date/Timeframe Search	Allows the User to "Filter" WHS Incident records based on the timeframes in the dropdown menu, which include: one day, one week, two weeks, one month.
Employee Name	Displays the name of the Employee who was injured.
Incident Details	Displays a description of Incident reported.
Incident Type	Displays the type of Incident reported.
Level of Importance	Displays the level of importance related to the Incident. The options are: High: Red. Medium: Orange. Low: Blue.
Date Reported	Displays the number date on which the Incident was reported.
Days Open	Displays the number of days the Incident has been open (if not yet resolved).
Reported By	Displays the Employee by whom the Incident was reported.
Attachment	Displays any attachments related to the Incident.
Actions	View - allows the User to view the Incident. Resolve - allows the User to resolve and close the Incident.

People & Culture – HR Questions Widget

The HR Questions Widget allows People and Culture users to view, track and manage HR Questions to ensure they are sent to the right person and responded to in a timely manner. People & Culture Users can also create FAQs, which are then available to all Users via the FAQs Folder.

HR Questions Widget - Questions Folder

Allows People and Culture Users to create and assign Questions to other Employees, or to Reassign Questions that they are not the best placed person to answer.

Field Name	Description
Search	This is a free text field that allows Users to filter the list based on specific keywords entered here.
+ Create New	Allows the User to create a new HR Question for an Employee using the HR Questions Wizard.
Active Tab	Displays all the currently active HR Questions (that have not yet been responded to and Completed).
Completed Tab	Displays all the HR Questions that have been responded to and Completed.
All Tab	Displays all the HR Questions - both Active and Completed.
Reassigned to Me	Displays all the HR Questions that have been Reassigned to that User. If an HR Question is initially sent to someone who is not the most appropriate person to respond to that Question, the Receiver can Reassign it to someone more appropriate to respond.
Filter	Allows the User to "Filter" HR Questions by level of importance: E.g. high, medium, low.
Date/Timeframe Search	Allows the User to "Filter" HR Questions based on the timeframes in the dropdown menu, which include: one day, one week, two weeks, one month. When active/a date range search parameter/filter is being applied, the looking glass square will be green.
Employee Name	Displays the name of the Employee who submitted the Question.
Ticket Number	Displays a ticket number for each HR Question submitted, the higher the number, the more recently the Question was submitted.
Question Type	Displays the type of Question asked. The options are: Company Policy. Training. General Question. Holidays.
Question Details	Displays a snippet of the Question asked (approximately 15 characters)
Days Open	Displays the number of days the Question has been open (without being answered).
Level of Importance	Displays the level of importance related to the Incident. The options are: High: Red. Medium: Orange. Low: Blue.
Date Sent	Displays the date on which the Question was sent.
Attachments	Displays any attachments associated with the Question.
Actions	Create New - allows the User to create a new Question. View - allows the User to view the Question. Reassign - allows the User to Reassign the Question to a more appropriate responder. Start Conversation - allows the User to start a conversation about the Question/Question topic. Respond - allows the User to respond to the Question. Complete - allows the User to complete the Question and close it.

People & Culture - HR Questions Widget - FAQs Folder

Allows People and Culture Users to create FAQs that are then available as a resource for all Employees.

Field Name	Description
Search	This is a free text field that allows Users to filter the list based on specific keywords entered here.
+ Create New	Allows the User to create a new FAQ.
Active Tab	Displays all the currently Active FAQs.
Unpublished Tab	Displays all the draft/unpublished FAQs.
Archived Tab	Displays all the Archived FAQs.
Category	Displays the type of the FAQ. The options are: Company Policy. Training. General Question. Holidays.
Details	Displays a short summary of the FAQ.
Owner	Displays the Departmental owner of the FAQ. The options are: Company Policy. Training. General Question. Holidays. Customer Service. Environmental. Executive Management. Finance & Admin. Operations. Sales. Sales & Marketing. Information Technology. Human Resources. OH&S.
Created Date	Displays the date the FAQ was created.
Updated Date	Displays the date the FAQ was updated (if it has been updated).
Actions	Create New - allows the User to create a new FAQ. View - allows the User to view the FAQ. Edit - allows the User to edit the FAQ. Publish - allows the User to Publish a draft FAQ. Archive - allows the User to Archive an FAQ. Reactivate - allows the User to Reactivate an Archived FAQ.

People & Culture - Change Request

The Change Request Widget allows Employees the ability to Create New Records and Update Existing Records via a Change Request process, which sends the request through an Authorisation process prior to the Record being Change or Created. Upon Authorisation, the records get created or updated depending on the Request.

Field Name	Description
Create New	At the Top Right of the Widget there is a "New Change" option. This can be used to Create a Change Request. Create New you can do a Max of 4 Records at a time (this option will be available if there are no existing records in that Object". Create and Replace you can do this with a Max of 4 Records. Add Additional you can do this with a Max of 4 records at a time.
Search	This is a free text field that allows Users to filter the list based on specific keywords entered here.
Inprogress	This will show Requests that are sent to the Manager for Authorisation.
Authorised	Shows Authorised Change Requests for Team Members.
Rejected	Shows Rejected Change Requests for Team Members.
Employee	Which Employee was the Change Request for.
Requested Date	Date the Change Request was done.
Change Request For	Which Object / Employee Information the Change Request for for.
Authorizer	Who was the Change Request Sent to for Authorisation.
Change Date	If Authorised, this is that date for when the Change Request will take place.
Actions	Authorise - Forward - Reject. These are options for the P&C Users which are available in the Inprogress Tab. These options are available until the Request has been Actioned. Once Authorised, The "Action", Start Crossboarding will appear for Job and or Salary Changes. If you start Crossboarding, The Crossboarding Wizard will appear. Any change to Salary or Job, will be able to be selected from the Crossboarding Wizard and used to merge into the templates (Contract - Letter) and used in the Crossboarding Pack. You can choose to Crossboard based on a Job Change, Salary Change, or you can choose to include Job and Salary in the same Crossboarding, based on what has been authorised. To Crossboard based on Job, Select the Action Menu and then Start Crossboarding. Make sure you use the Job based Pack which caters for Job Change only. If you want to Start Crossboarding based on Salary only, select Start Crossboarding from the Salary Record. If you want to do both Job and Salary, select the Check Boxes on the left for both and then you will see the “Start Crossboarding” Item appear top right of the Widget. Or Select the Action, Start Crossboarding on either record. Changes made to Job or Salary can be used in this way in relation to Crossboarding Packs. Note: Authorising a Job / Salary Change Request at the same time from two separate Salary Job Changes Requests at Authorisation Stage: If you perform a Change Request for a Job or Salary, upon Authorisation of either the Job or Salary Change Request, you will be able to select the alternate Authorisation to include in that Authorisation, So if you select the Authorise Salary, you can choose to also authorise the relevant Job Change Request at the same time.

@@ Line 25: / Line 25: @@
 &#9;5. Company Policies (Access to All Business).
 <br>
-&#9;6. Training (Access to All Business) [Coming Soon].
+&#9;6. Performance Management (Access to All Business).
 <br>
-&#9;7. Performance Management (Access to All Business).
+&#9;7. Announcements & Acknowledgements (Access to All Business).
-<br>
-&#9;8. Announcements & Acknowledgements (Access to All Business).
 <br>
 &#9;8. Timesheets Management (Access to All Business).
 <br>
-&#9;10. Time Off Management (Access to All Business).
+&#9;9. Time Off Management (Access to All Business).
 <br>
-&#9;11. HR Surveys (Access to All Business).
+&#9;10. HR Surveys (Access to All Business).
+<br>
+&#9;11. WHS Incident (Access to All Business).
+<br>
+&#9;12. Compliance Management (Access to All Business).
+<br>
+&#9;13. HR Questions (Access to All Business).
+<br>
+&#9;14. Training (Access to All Business).
 These widgets can be moved around in the Dashboard. They can also be removed from the Dashboard. This can be done in Maintenance --> Groups --> Permissions --> Select a Group and Go to Widgets.
+<b>Note:</b> Notifications about Core-HR and Performance Management related Tasks and Reminders can be accessed via two locations:
+*System Inbox: click on the small envelope in the top right corner of the System - just to the left of your name (after you click on it a menu opens - scroll down and select 'See all Alerts' - which will open the inbox).
+*The Tasks & Notifications Widget on the People & Culture Dashboard.
 ==People and Culture Widget - Search Team Member Personal Details==
@@ Line 43: / Line 54: @@
 The following information is displayed in the "Personal Details" Widget:
-# Name.
+&#9;1. Employee photo. <br>
-# Job.
+NOTE: Photos/impages can be saved in different locations - on the User record and/or on the Employee record. The System displays the photo based on the following logic:
-# Email address.
+*If there is a photo saved on the User record this will be displayed.
-# Phone Number.
+*If there is no photo saved on the User record, the photo saved on the Employee record will be displayed.
-# Department.
+*If there is no photo on either the User or the Employee record, then the photo will be blank/empty.
-# Location.
+&#9;2. Name. <br>
-# Salary.
+&#9;3. Email address. <br>
-# Manager.
+&#9;4. Phone Number. With Country prefix. E.g. +61... <br>
+&#9;5. View Team. <br>
+&#9;6. Change Password. <br>
+&#9;7. Change Work Email. <br>
+&#9;8. Change Phone Number. <br>
+&#9;9. View Internal Vacancies. <br>
+&#9;10. Job Description. <br>
+<b>NOTES:</b>
+*To display the Job Description -and it will be displayed in a popup/lightbox. This assumes that a Job Description has been created for the Job that the Employee holds.
+**If the Job Description has been added to the 'Notes' field on the Job Description record, then this will appear under the 'General' Tab in the pop up (if there's no Job Description added to the 'Notes' field then the 'General' Tab won't appear).
+**If the Job Description has been attached as a .PDF on the Job Description record, then this will appear under the 'PDF' Tab in the pop up (if there's no PDF/file attached to the Job Description then the 'PDF' Tab won't appear).
+**If the Job Description has been added to the 'Notes' field and also attached as a .PDF on the Job Description record, then both Tabs will appear.
+**If the Employee has more than two Jobs, then the main/primary Job will appear at the top/first (listed as the 'Primary' Job) and any additional/subsequent Job/s will appear underneath (listed as 'Current' Job/s).<br>
+&#9;11. Job Name. <br>
+&#9;11. Department. <br>
+&#9;12. Location. <br>
+&#9;13. Salary. <br>
+&#9;14. Manager. <br>
-The following functionality is also available via this Widget:
+==People and Culture Widget - Time Off and Pay==
-*View Team.
-*Change password.
-*View internal vacancies.
-*<b>Search Employee details</b> - which enables HR/P&C Managers to search all Employees and view their Personal Details.
-==People and Culture Widget - Search Time off and Pay==
 The following information is displayed in the "Time off and Pay" Widget:
-# Annual leave.
+&#9;1. Annual leave. This information is linked to Employment Country which is assigned to an Employee in the New Employee Wizard or against their Employee Masterfile Record. If this is selected as New Zealand, Leave Information will be displayed differently. Based on Entitled and Number of Hours Accrued for New Zealand. Available and Taken for Australia. <br>
-# Personal leave.
+&#9;2. Personal leave. If Employment Country is New Zealand, this will be labelled Sick Leave.<br>
-# Time in Lieu.
+&#9;3. Time in Lieu. <br>
-# Timesheets.
+&#9;4. Timesheets. <br>
-# Payslips.
+&#9;5. Away Today. <br>
-# Next holidays.
+&#9;6. Next Holidays.<br>
+&#9;7. Start Date.<br>
-The following functionality is also available via this Widget:
+&#9;8. Forecast.<br>
-*<b>Search Employee details</b> - which enables HR/P&C Managers to search all Employees and view their Time off and Pay.
+&#9;9. Long Service Leave.<br>
+&#9;10. Accrual Rate.<br>
+&#9;11. Last Personal Leave Length.<br>
+&#9;12. Last Annual Leave Length.<br>
+<b>NOTES:</b>
+*Hours Taken This Year equals calendar year.
+*Hours Taken This Year will only display hours related to Leave/Time Off requested directly in Subscribe-HR. If the Employee requests Leave/Time Off outside of Subscribe-HR (e.g. via T&A), that Leave/those hours will not be displayed here.
+*'Last Personal/Annual Leave' displays are also linked/related to Leave/Time Off requests made directly in Subscribe-HR.
 ==People and Culture - Tasks and Notifications Widget==
@@ Line 78: / Line 106: @@
 The Tasks and Notifications Widget for People and Culture allows the People and Culture user to have access to "Team Dashboards" to receive, send and interact with "Quick Tasks" and automatically triggered workflows based on all people. These Task and Notification items are also delivered into the System "Inbox." "Quick Tasks" can be sent from the [[New-Quick-Task|Quick Tasks Wizard]], or from the "Tasks and Notifications" Widget itself. If a Manager has Delegated their Tasks and Notifications to System Administration Users/People & Culture Users , People & Culture Users will see those Tasks and Notifications in this Widget.
-Because the number of notifications can be quite high (especially for Managers and System Administrators/People & Culture Users), notifications emails (that go to the User's email inbox) have to be manually activated via System settings. However, all notifications (for tasks and reminders) will appear in the online/System "Inbox" for each User. This Inbox can be accessed via the envelope in the top right-hand corner of the System, next to the User's name and photo. Alternatively, Users can choose to activate a "Summary" email to their email Inbox (see below for instructions).
+Because the number of notifications can be quite high (especially for Managers and System Administrators/People & Culture Users), notifications emails (that go to the User's personal email inbox) have to be manually activated via System settings. However, all notifications (for Tasks and Reminders) will appear in the online/System "Inbox" for each User. This Inbox can be accessed via the envelope in the top right-hand corner of the System, next to the User's name and photo. People & Culture Users can access a complete history of all Tasks & Notifications (current and previous) assigned/sent across the organisation via the 'Workflow History' Tab in the Inbox. Alternatively, Users can choose to activate a "Summary" email to their email Inbox (see below for instructions).
+<b>NOTES</b>: There are two types of 'Notifications' sent by the System:
+*Notifications that are 'Read' or 'View' only (and don't require any actions to be taken).
+*Notifications that are associated with an 'Action' required by the Recipient (which will contact a 'Click Here' link relating to the 'Action' required).
+The 'General' Tab displays both of these types of Notifications. If/when a Notification relates to an 'Action' and that action is 'Completed,' then the notification will move to the 'Completed' Tab. If the 'Action' is not taken, then it will move to the 'Overdue' Tab. However, general View/Read only Notifications will remain under the 'General' Tab permanently.
+All Tasks, Notifications and Reminders that are sent to the actual email inbox of Employees will contain a link that says: 'Please Click Here to login and view this notification.' The text 'Click Here' contains a hyperlink that will take the User directly to this notification in their System Inbox. It will also open the relevant/associated notifications and tasks for review.
+Tasks & Notifications will appear in this Widget in the following manner:
+*My Info Dashboard - Users see Tasks & Notifications that relate to them as an Employee only.
+*Manager Dashboard - Users see Tasks & Notifications that relate to their role as a Manager. Therefore only Tasks & Notifications for actions the Manager needs to take in relation to their Team Members appear in the Widget on this Dashboard.
+*People & Culture Dashboard - Users see Tasks & Notifications that relate to them as a People & Culture User. Therefore Tasks & Notifications related to their management of all Employees appear in the Widget on this Dashboard.
 <table border="1" width="100%" cellspacing="0">
@@ Line 87: / Line 128: @@
 <tr>
 <td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Notifications</b></font></td>
-<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This functionality allows the User to trigger a "Summary" email of all Tasks and Notifications relevant to them/their User Group. To enable a notification summary email:
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This functionality allows the User to trigger a "Summary" email re Tasks and Notifications relevant to them/their User Group. To enable a notification summary email:
-#Click on "Notifications" (top right-hand corner of the Widget).
+&#9;1. Click on "Notifications" (top right-hand corner of the Widget).
-The settings options for Summary Emails are:
+The standard setting in the System is for all Users to receive an Email Summary Daily at 8:00am. This can be changed using the options below.
-*Notification Frequency - Daily or Once a Week.
+The settings options for Tasks & Notifications Emails are:
-*Notification Start Day and Time - specify the start day and time, and you will then continue to receive a Summary email at the same time, according to the option you selected in the previous step (daily or weekly).
+*Notification Frequency - Daily or Once a Week. The User needs to specify if they want to receive a Summary email daily or weekly.
-#Click "Activate" to activate these settings.
+<b>NOTE:</b>
-#To change or deactivate the summary email, click on "Notifications" to reopen the Wizard.
+**If the 'Notifications/Summary' setting is not activated, then Tasks & Notifications will be sent in real-time (send when triggered). That is, an individual email for each Task & Notification is sent to the User's Inbox in Subscribe-HR and also to their Company email/Inbox in real-time. This is the System Standard/Default (unless changed as outlined below).
+**If the 'Notifications/Summary' setting is activated then a 'Summary' of Tasks & Notifications will be sent to the User's Inbox in Subscribe-HR, setting selected above (Daily or Weekly).
+*Notification Start Day and Time - the User needs to specify the start day and time for the Email Summary/ies. The User will then continue to receive a Summary email at the same time, (per the settings selected (daily or weekly)) unless/until the settings are changed.
+<b>NOTE:</b>
+*If you activate a Summary email (daily or weekly) that means that Employees who are sent specific email notifications re 'Tasks' (e.g. Time Off authorisation requests or Vacancy Requisition authorisation requests) won't receive those notifications separately (and they will need to review their System Info and/or Tasks & Notifications Widget separately to see if they receive any such notifications throughout the day/between summary emails).
+&#9;2. Click "Activate" to activate these settings.
+&#9;3. To change or deactivate the summary email, click on "Notifications" to reopen the Wizard.
 *For changes, simply change the notification frequency, notification start day or time settings, then click "Update."
-*To disable the email summary altogether, simply click "Disable."
+*To disable the current settings, simply click "Disable." This will return the delivery of Tasks & Notifications to the Default - which is a Daily Summary at 8:00am.
 Depending on the Employee's User Group/Permissions (Employee, Manager, HR/People & Culture Manager), the User will receive the following information in their Summary Email:
 *<b>Employees</b> - will receive a summary of only their own Tasks & Notifications (as displayed in their Inbox).
 *<b>Managers</b> - will receive a summary of their own Tasks & Notifications (as displayed in their Inbox), as well as those in the Inboxes of the Employees in their team.
-*<b>HR/P&C Managers</b> - will receive a summary of their own Tasks & Notifications (as displayed in their Inbox), as well as those in the Inboxes of Managers and Employees (that is, they will receive a Summary of everyone's Tasks & Notifications as at that date/time.</font></td>
+*<b>HR Managers/People & Culture Users</b> - will receive a summary of their own Tasks & Notifications (as displayed in their Inbox), as well as those in the Inboxes of Managers and Employees (that is, they will receive a Summary of everyone's Tasks & Notifications as at that date/time).</font></td>
 </tr>
 <tr>
 <td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Manage Delegation</b></font></td>
-<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Allows User to Delegate Tasks and Notifications to their Manager. Managers will be able to delegate to other Managers and/or System Administrators.</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Employees can delegate authority to someone else in their absence. Delegations work as follows:
+*<b>Employees</b> - can delegate authority to/for their Manager to receive, review and/or action standard and task related notifications.
+*<b>Managers</b> - can delegate authority to their Manager, other Managers or People & Culture Users to receive, review and/or action standard and task related notifications. They Can also delegate Authority on behalf of their direct reports, so that the person to whom delegation is assigned can receive, review and/or action standard and task related notifications.
+*<b>People & Culture Users</b> - can delegate authority to their Manager or People & Culture Users to receive, review and/or action standard and task related notifications. They Can also delegate Authority on behalf of their direct reports, so that the person to whom delegation is assigned can receive, review and/or action standard and task related notifications (per the above).</font></td>
 </tr>
 <tr>
-<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>+ Quick Task</b></font></td>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Search</b></font></td>
-<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This allows the User to send a Task or Notification to another User or to themselves. The recipient list will indicate who their Manager is and HR users.</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This is a text field which you can use to enter keywords to search for. The list below will display tasks and notification relating to the keywords entered.</font></td>
 </tr>
 <tr>
-<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Search</b></font></td>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Today</b></font></td>
-<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Search Tasks and Notifications by keyword. E.g. Search on Task Name, Birthdate or Person's Name</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This Tab displays current Tasks & Notifications (due today - that is the date that the User/Employee is logged into the System). Once completed, Tasks (and their associated notifications) move to the 'Completed' Tab.</font></td>
 </tr>
 <tr>
-<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Today Tab</b></font></td>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Upcoming</b></font></td>
-<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Shows the User what Tasks and Notifications for "Today." The numbers will indicate how many items are relevant.</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This Tab displays Tasks & Notifications  due on any day/date after 'today' (see above). Once completed, Tasks (and their associated notifications) move to the 'Completed' Tab.</font></td>
 </tr>
 <tr>
-<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Upcoming Tab</b></font></td>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>General</b></font></td>
-<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Shows the User what Tasks and Notifications are "Upcoming." The numbers will indicate how many items are relevant.</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This Tab displays a list of all Notifications that are triggered/sent by the System.
+<b>NOTE</b>: There are two types of 'Notifications' sent by the System:
+*Notifications that are 'Read' or 'View' only (and don't require any actions to be taken).
+*Notifications that are associated with an 'Action' required by the Recipient (which will contact a 'Click Here' link relating to the 'Action' required).
+The 'General' Tab displays both of these types of Notifications. If/when a Notification relates to an 'Action' and that action is 'Completed,' then the notification will move to the 'Completed' Tab. If the 'Action' is not taken, then it will move to the 'Overdue' Tab. However, general View/Read only Notifications will remain under the 'General' Tab permanently.</font></td>
 </tr>
 <tr>
-<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Overdue Tab</b></font></td>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Overdue</b></font></td>
-<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Shows the User what Tasks and Notifications are "Overdue." The numbers will indicate how many items are relevant.</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This Tab displays all Tasks & Notifications that are past their due date.</font></td>
 </tr>
 <tr>
-<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Completed Tab</b></font></td>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Completed</b></font></td>
-<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Shows the User what Tasks and Notifications are "Completed." The numbers will indicate how many items are relevant.</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This Tab displays all Tasks that have been completed.</font></td>
 </tr>
 <tr>
-<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>My Sent Tasks Tab</b></font></td>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>My Sent Tasks</b></font></td>
-<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Shows the User what Tasks and Notifications have been sent by that User. The number will indicate how many items are relevant.</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This Tab displays tasks that the User has sent (either to themselves or someone else).</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Workflow History</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Displays a list containing the history of all actions, tasks and notifications (including a record of Authorisations, Cancellations and Rejections where relevant). The Workflow History includes actions, tasks and notifications currently in progress and those completed in the past. Each line item/record has a status. The action/task is either pending or completed. The history is arranged based the following icons:
+*<b>Notepad & Pencil</b> - displays tasks/actions pending or completed (completed tasks/actions are date and time stamped and the action taken is recorded).
+*<b>Calendar</b> - displays reminders that are sent to Employees about tasks/actions that need to be completed.
+*<b>Information ( 'i' )</b> - relates to authorisations taken by other Employees (not related to the logged in User).
+*<b>Show Related Tasks</b> - appears when there are/have been a series of tasks/actions in a multi-step workflow process,, including actions/tasks not related to the logged ion User.
+*<b>NOTE</b>:
+**People & Culture Users can see the Work flow History for all notifications in the System (about all Employees/Tasks/Notifications).
+**Managers can see the Work flow History for Tasks/Notifications about their direct reports/Team Members only.
+**Employees can see the Work flow History for Tasks/Notifications about themselves only.
+</font></td>
 </tr>
 <tr>
 <td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Filter</b></font></td>
-<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Allows the User to "Filter" their items by Tag or Filter: E.g. HR, Recruitment, Onboarding, Performance, Note to Self, Delegated etc.</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">You can select filters to apply so that specific tasks and notifications will be displayed. You can filter the list by Solution (HR, Recruitment, Onboarding etc.) and/or delegated tasks.</font></td>
 </tr>
 <tr>
 <td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Task Name</font></td>
-<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Name of Task. E.g. Birthdate Reminder</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">The subject of the task will appear under here.</font></td>
 </tr>
 <tr>
 <td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Assigned To</font></td>
-<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">The Employee/User that the Task or Notification is assigned to. You can re-assign who the task is assigned to. This will send them the Task or Notification by clicking on the User Name / Icon.</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">The Employee the task or reminder was assigned to will appear here.</font></td>
 </tr>
 <tr>
 <td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Relates To</font></td>
-<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">The Employee/User that the Task or Notification relates to/is about.</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">The Employee the task or reminder relates to will appear here.</font></td>
 </tr>
 <tr>
 <td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Due Date</font></td>
-<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">The Date the Reminder is Due.</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Task due date will appear here. This determines if the task should appear in the today, upcoming or overdue section.</font></td>
 </tr>
 <tr>
-<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Filter (column)</font></td>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Filter (Column)</font></td>
-<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Filter tags selected against the task/notificaiton will appear under here.</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Filters selected against the task will appear under here.</font></td>
 </tr>
 <tr>
 <td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Actions</font></td>
-<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This dropdown allows the User to perform either of the following:<br><b>Approve</b> - approve the Task/Notification<br><b>View Message</b> - view the task/notification message</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Different Tasks and Notifications have different actions associated with them. The options are:
+*<b>View Message:</b> Allows the User to view the notification/reminder message.
+*<b>Cancel:</b> Allows the User to Cancel the Authorisation request.
+*<b>Authorise/Reject/Forward:</b> Allows the User to Authorise, Reject or Forward the Authorisation request. <b>Note:</b> when an Authorisation is forwarded, it is assumed that the individual is Authorising the request and forwarding it to other Employees for further Authorisation. The request is not considered complete/fully Authorised until the final individual clicks the 'Authorise' button.</font></td>
 </tr>
 </table>
 ==People & Culture - Company Policies Widget==
 The People & Culture Company Policies Widget allows HR/People & Culture Managers to access their Team's Company Policy Activity. The HR/People & Culture Manager can search for a Team Member and then use Filters to see which Company Policies Need to be attended to. Managers can Resend a notification to an Employee if that person has unopened/unread policies. The Company Policy Widget respects the User Group Permissions on the person accessing the system.
+<b>NOTE:</b> Company Policies can be associated with 'Jobs,' 'Departments,' or 'Locations,' although Jobs are the primary association used. If a Job you're creating for a New Employee for doesn't have (a) Company Policy/(ies) assigned to it, you will not be able to complete this step in the [[New-Employee-Wizard#New_Employee_from_Scratch_-_Company_Policies_Wizard|New Employee Wizard]] and will be required to send Company Policies later via the Company Policies Widget (from the 'No Policies' Tab). It is therefore recommended that Users create and assign (a) Company Policy/(ies) to the Job (or Department/Location) via the [[New-Company-Policies|Company Policies Wizard]] <b>before</b> you create a New Employee and place them in a Job.
+The '+Create New' Link on the People & Culture version of the Company Policies Widget opens the [[New-Company-Policies|Company Policies Wizard]] and allows them to create 'New,' edit/update 'Existing' or send 'Current' Company Policy/ies to Employee/s, Job/s, Department/s or Location/s.
+<b>NOTES:</b>
+*For compliance purposes, the primary/preferred way to send Company Policies is to 'Link' them to 'Job/s' (as opposed to sending them individual Employee's on an 'Ad Hoc' basis), then either Location/s and/or Department/s.
+**When each Company Policy record is created in the System, they should be 'Linked' to Job/s, Department/s and Location/s via the Company Policy Record (General > Core-HR > Company Policies > select a 'Company Policy' and update these fields.
+***Even though these 'Linked' fields aren't 'Mandatory,' to ensure that Company Policy features work correctly in the System (in the [[New-Onboarding|Onboarding Welcome packs/Workflows]], the [[New-Crossboarding|Crossboarding Workflows]], and the [[People-and-Culture-Widgets#People_.26_Culture_Widget_-_Company_Policies_.E2.80.93_No_Policies_Tab|No Policies Tab]] of the People & Culture User's [[People-and-Culture-Widgets#People_.26_Culture_-_Company_Policies_Widget|Company Policies Widget]], Users are advised, at a minimum, to 'Link' all Company Policies to a 'Job' as a minimum.
 <table border="1" width="100%" cellspacing="0">
@@ Line 176: / Line 255: @@
 <tr>
 <td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Search</b></font></td>
-<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Allows Managers to search Team to see the Company Policy Information for the Team Member being searched for.</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Allows People & Culture Users to search Team to see the Company Policy Information for the Team Member being searched for.</font></td>
 </tr>
 <tr>
@@ Line 237: / Line 316: @@
 </tr>
 <tr>
-<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Action Required</b></font></td>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Reminder</b></font></td>
 <td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">If the Company Policy is not yet complete, this column will display a recommended Action, e,g, Send Reminder.</font></td>
 </tr>
@@ Line 286: / Line 365: @@
 ===People & Culture Widget - Company Policies – No Policies Tab===
+The 'No Policies' Tab is where Employees who have not been sent any Company Policies (that is, the Employee wasn't Onboarded, or they weren't sent any Company Policy/ies after their Employee record was created and there was no Company Policies 'Step' including in the [[New-Onboarding|Onboarding Welcome pack/Workflow]]) are listed. People & Culture users can 'Send Policies' to Employees, however, to send Policy/ies via this pathway requires that these Company Policies are 'Linked' to the Job the Employee holds, the Department the Employee works in, or the Location the Employee works at. The [[New-Onboarding|Onboarding Wizard]] Wiki contains more information about 'Linking' Company Policies to Jobs, Departments, or locations. It is not possible to send Company Policy/ies directly to an Employee. via this 'Send Policies' action/link. 'New' or 'Current/Existing' Company Policy/ies can be sent to (an) Employee/s via the [[New-Company-Policies|Company Policies Wizard]].
+People & Culture Users can 'Send Policies' to 'All Employees,' whereas Managers can only 'Send Policies' to their Direct Reports.
 <table border="1" width="100%" cellspacing="0">
@@ Line 302: / Line 385: @@
 <tr>
 <td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>User Account</b></font></td>
-<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This colmn will specify if the Employee has a User Account.</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This column will specify if the Employee has a User Account (it is not possible to send Company Policy/ies to Employees via the 'Send Policies' action/link if that Employee doesn't have an 'Active' user Account).</font></td>
 </tr>
 <tr>
-<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Action Required</b></font></td>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Send Policies and Send Reminder</b></font></td>
-<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">If the Company Policy is not yet complete, this column will display a recommended Action, e,g, Send Reminder.</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">If the Employee has not received any Company Policies, they will show up in this tab. E.G. They have been Onboarded without Company Policies, or they have not been Onboarded at all (E.G. if the Employee record was created via a Data Upload, or imported from/via a Payroll integration). Employee/s can be sent Company Policy/ies (<b>Send Policies</b>). This will send the Policy/ies and that have been 'Linked' to that Employee's Job, Department or Location. Company Policy/ies can be resent (<b>Send Reminder</b>) if the Employee has not opened/read/ and 'Agreed' to them (and a reminder needs to be sent). If you use the 'Send Policies' option to send Company Policies to an Employee who has not received any Company Policies previously (and who does not have an 'Active' User Account), you will be asked to 'Activate' their 'User Account' (by assigning ESS/Employee Service Service User Group (plus others if required)) before sending. All Employees/Users need a an Active User Account to be able to 'Open,' 'Read' and 'Accept' the Company Policy/ies.</font></td>
 </tr>
 </table>
@@ Line 335: / Line 418: @@
 <td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Search Title</b> (Under Announcements Tab)</font></td>
 <td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This is a free text field that you can use to search Announcements based on keywords you enter in the search field.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Attachment (Under Announcements Tab)</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Attach a Photo. This will appear on the Feed in the Announcements Dashboard.</font></td>
 </tr>
 <tr>
@@ Line 363: / Line 450: @@
 <td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Acknowledgements Tab</b></font></td>
 <td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Clicking this tab will display all acknowledgements posted by users.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>All Received Sub-Folder</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Contains acknowledgements sent to/received by the Employee.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>All Sent Sub-Folder</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Contains acknowledgements sent by Employees.</font></td>
 </tr>
 <tr>
 <td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Create Acknowledgement (Under Acknowledgements Tab)</font></td>
-<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Top Right of the Widget. Starts the New Acknowledgement Wizard, for you to be able to create a new acknowledgement. This is also available from the "START" options</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Top Right of the Widget. Starts the New Acknowledgement Wizard, for you to be able to create a new acknowledgement. This is also available from the "START" menu.</font></td>
 </tr>
 <tr>
@@ Line 377: / Line 472: @@
 </tr>
 <tr>
-<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Keyword (Under Acknowledgements Tab)</font></td>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Title (Under Acknowledgements Tab)</font></td>
-<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Keywords entered upon creation of Acknowledgement will display here as hashtags.</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Displays the Title of the Acknowledgement.</font></td>
 </tr>
 <tr>
@@ Line 389: / Line 484: @@
 </tr>
 <tr>
-<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Acknowledgement Name (Under Acknowledgements Tab)</font></td>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Sent To (Under Acknowledgements Tab)</font></td>
-<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Employees, locations and/or departments that have been acknowledged will be displayed here. You can select/add specific recipients for your Acknowledgement here, or you can leave these fields blank.</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Employees, locations and/or departments that have been acknowledged will be displayed here.</font></td>
 </tr>
 <tr>
-<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Action (Under Announcements Tab)</font></td>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Sent By (Under Acknowledgements Tab)</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">The name of the individual who sent this Acknowledgement will be displayed here.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Actions (Under Announcements Tab)</font></td>
 <td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Use this dropdown to action the following:
 *<b>Edit</b> - edit Announcements.
@@ Line 401: / Line 500: @@
 </tr>
 <tr>
-<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Action (Under Acknowledgements Tab)</font></td>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Actions (Under Acknowledgements Tab)</font></td>
 <td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Use this dropdown to action the following:
 *<b>Edit</b> - edit Acknowledgements. When you click Edit, you are able to edit the keywords of Acknowledgement, the content and the acknowledged employees.
@@ Line 409: / Line 508: @@
 </table>
-==People and Culture Widget - Training Widget==
+==People & Culture – Training Widget==
-The People and Culture Training Widget allow HR users to access their Team's Training Activity. The Manager can access Training Course and Event Information and Current Training Records for their team members. The Training Widget respects the User Group Permissions on the person accessing the system.
+The People and Culture Training Widget allows People & Cultures users to access and manage Training Activity for all Employees. People & Culture Users can access Training Course, Event Information, Current Training and CPD Records for their team members. People & Culture Users and/or System Administrators can also create/set up Training related content (whereas Manager can't).
+The Training Widget provides access to the following Training information and related features:
+*Training Analysis.
+*Mandatory Training.
+*Completed Training Records.
+*e-Learning (if the Go1 App is installed).
+*e-Learning Catalogue (if the Go1 App is installed).
+*Training Catalogue.
+*Training Events.
+*CPD Training.
+The new Training Widget has been designed to do all the heavy lifting related to managing Face-to-Face and e-Learning Training.
+===People & Culture - Training Widget – Training Analysis Folder===
+The Training Analysis Folder provides a status of all the Training for each Employee at a glance. People & Culture users can also view the Training Guide for the Job that each Employee holds to compare it to their Training Analysis.
 <table border="1" width="100%" cellspacing="0">
@@ Line 418: / Line 534: @@
 <td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Description</b></font></td>
 </tr>
-<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">XXXXXX</font></td>
+<tr>
-<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX</font></td>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Search</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This is a free text field that allows Users to filter the list based on specific keywords entered here.</font></td>
 </tr>
 <tr>
-<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">XXXXXX</font></td>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Employee</font></td>
-<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">XXXXXXXXXXXXX</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This column contains the Employee name associated with that Training Analysis record.</font></td>
 </tr>
 <tr>
-<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">XXXXXX</font></td>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Overdue</font></td>
-<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This column shows any Overdue Training. Refresher required and Mandatory Training can become Overdue.</font></td>
 </tr>
 <tr>
-<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">XXXXX</font></td>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Renewal Required</font></td>
-<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2"> This column contains the number of Training Courses or Certificate/Licences that require the Employee to attend ‘Renewal’ Training.</font></td>
 </tr>
 <tr>
-<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">XXXXX</font></td>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">To Do</font></td>
-<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This column contains the number of Training related ‘To Dos’ (Face-to-Face, Content or e-learning) for that Employee.</font></td>
 </tr>
 <tr>
-<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">XXXXXXX</font></td>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Mandatory</font></td>
-<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2"> This column contains the number of ‘Mandatory’ Training Courses (Face-to-Face, Content, or e-learning) assigned to that Employee.</font></td>
 </tr>
 <tr>
-<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">XXXXXXX</font></td>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">In Progress</font></td>
-<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This column contains the number of ‘In Progress’ Training Courses (Face-to-Face or e-learning) assigned to that Employee.</font></td>
 </tr>
 <tr>
-<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">XXXXX</font></td>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Waiting List</font></td>
-<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2"> This column contains the number of Face-to-Face Training Courses that Employee is ‘Waitlisted’ for.</font></td>
 </tr>
 <tr>
-<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">XXXXX</font></td>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">No Show</font></td>
-<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2"> This column contains the number of ‘No Show’ Training Event (Face-to-Face) assigned to that Employee.</font></td>
 </tr>
 <tr>
-<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">XXXXXX</font></td>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Completed</font></td>
-<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2"> This column contains the number of ‘Completed’ Training Courses (Face-to-Face or e-learning) assigned to that Employee.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Actions</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">The options are:<br>
+*<b>View Training Guide</b> - The ‘Training Guide’ provides a summary of all the Training assigned to that Employee/Employee’s Job, which therefore makes that Training either a requirement or a suggestion for the Employee to complete.</font></td>
 </tr>
 </table>
+===People & Culture - Training Widget – Mandatory Training Folder===
+There are two types of Mandatory Training requirements:
+*<b>Face-to-face:</b> this requires an Employee to attend face-to-face training conducted by either the Employer, or a third-party. Employees are usually first placed on a waiting list a Course type, and then when the Course/Event is scheduled, they are added to the waiting list for the Course/Event and then booked to attend.
+*<b>e-Learning:</b> if a third-party e-Learning App is installed, then e-Learning is available within Subscribe-HR and all e-Learning content can be viewed and completed via the Training Widget.
+*<b>Content:</b> relates to Content Type that has been assigned as the Training Method. Allows for Content to be sent to the Persons Mandatory Training Tab in the Training widget so they can Acknowledge or Reject it. Content can be reissued if it's rejected. Certificate & Licence can be created from completed Content Acknowledgement via "Actions". A Training Record will show in the Employee Training Sub Folder and the Training Tab in the Training Widget, when the Content has been Acknowledged.
+Mandatory Training can be assigned to an Employee in two ways:
+*Via the Job they hold: Mandatory Training can be assigned to Jobs via the Activation Hub > [[Dashboard-Activation-Hub#Core-HR|Core-HR Widget]] > Training Manager > Action > Assign Training > Create New > Tick ‘Mandatory at Start of Employment.’
+*Directly against the Employee Record: Mandatory Training can be assigned to the Employee via ‘Create New Mandatory Training Requirement’ in the Mandatory Training Folder of the Training Widget.
+<br>
+The Mandatory Training Folder in the Training Widget contains all the 'Mandatory Training Requirements' assigned to the Job held by an Employee, or to the Employee directly. Note that ‘Mandatory Training Requirements’ are not actual ‘Training Records.’ A Mandatory Training Requirement only becomes a 'Training Record' when the Employee has been scheduled to attend a Training Course Event (with a start date assigned). The Employee must then attend the Course Event and complete the Training for a Training Record (for that Mandatory Training Requirement) to appear on their Employee Training Records sub-object.  Upon Renewal of the Mandatory Training being completed, the Renewal record for the Mandatory Training, will be shown in "To Do" in the Mandatory Training Tab.
+<br>
+For Training to be recognised as Mandatory - it must be flagged/marked as such. There are multiple ways to mark Training as 'Mandatory' (either when creating a Training type, or retrospectively if needed)
+*Via the Activation Hub > [[Dashboard-Activation-Hub#Core-HR|Core-HR Widget]] > Training Manager > Action > Assign Training > Create New > Tick ‘Mandatory at Start.’
+*Via the Activation Hub > [[Dashboard-Activation-Hub#Core-HR|Core-HR Widget]] > Training Manager > Face-to-Face Training > Select Training Record > Action > Assign Training > Action > 'Make Mandatory.'
+*Via the Activation Hub > [[Dashboard-Activation-Hub#Core-HR|Core-HR Widget]] > Training Manager > e-Learning Training > Select Training Record > Action > Assign Training > add Course/s to the 'Mandatory Training' field.
+<br>
+All Face-to-Face Mandatory Training 'Requirements' must be actioned (to create an actual Training Record) by the People & Culture User or System Administrator in one of two ways:
+*The Employee attends (and completes) an ad-hoc/one-off Course (usually with a third-party provider).
+*The Employee is added to a Course Waiting List (and then enrolled to attend the Face-to-Face Training Event) when that Course is next scheduled by the business.
+<br>
+Only when an Employee has completed a Face-to-Face Course/Event will a Training Record be assigned to their Employee/Training Record sub-object.
+All Mandatory e-Learning Training requirements appear in the 'Mandatory Training' Folder and if e-Learning content has been assigned to the 'Mandatory Training' content Group for the Job that the Employee holds, then those Courses will also appear in the e-Learning Folder.
+<table border="1" width="100%" cellspacing="0">
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Field Name</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Description</b></font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Search</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This is a free text field that allows Users to filter the list based on specific keywords entered here.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>+ Create New Mandatory Training Requirement</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Allows the User to create a new Mandatory Training Requirement for an Employee. That ‘requirement’ needs to be actioned – either by enrolling the Employee in an e-Learning Course (which is only possible if a third-party e-Learning App is installed/integrated), creating a one-off Training Record, or by adding the Employee to a Course Waiting List. User can also create Content based Mandatory Training by Selecting the Training Method as Content. This allow for the person who the Training is being created for, to Acknowledge or Reject this from the Mandatory Training Tab.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>To Do Tab</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Displays the current Mandatory Training Requirements that need to be actioned for all Employees. Records that appear on this Tab are only ‘requirements,’ not actual Training Records. Training 'requirements' only become active, or ‘In Progress’ Training once the requirement is actioned. This is done either by an Employee (because the Training Requirement has been assigned to them and they have started it), or, when a People & Culture User or Manager enrols the Employee on an internal Training Course Event, an external one-off Training Course/Event, or they enrol the Employee in an e-Learning Course. </font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>In Progress Tab</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2"> Displays all Mandatory Training Requirements that are in progress, that is, the Employee has either started their e-Learning training so as to fulfil that requirement, or they’ve been placed on a Course Waiting List/scheduled for a Course/Event.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Completed Tab</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2"> Displays all Mandatory Training Requirements that have been completed and for which a Training record has now been created.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>All Tab</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2"> Displays all of the Mandatory Training Requirements listed above.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Employee</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This column contains the Employee name that the mandatory training requirement is assigned to.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Mandatory Training Guide</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This column contains the Training/Course type that has is assigned to the Employee as a 'Mandatory Training Requirement.' This requirement needs to be actioned, either by adding the Employee to a Course/Event Waiting list (for Face-to-Face Training), or enrolling them in e-Learning Training.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Delivery Method </font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This column specifies if the Mandatory Training Requirement is e-Learning or Face-to-Face.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Record Created</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This column indicates how many days have elapsed since the Mandatory Training Requirement was assigned to the Employee. If more than 90 days have elapsed, the date on which the requirement was created will be displayed.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Start Date</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This column indicates the Training start date if/when the Employee has been booked on a Course/Event or enrolled on an e-Learning Course.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">End Date</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This column indicates the Training end date if/when the Employee has been booked on a Course/Event or enrolled on an e-Learning Course.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Record Created</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This column specifies the number of days since the Mandatory Training Requirement was created.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Actions</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">The options are:
+*<b>Add Employee to Course Waiting List</b> - allows the User to add the Employee to the Course Waiting list so that they are then enrolled when an internal Training Event for that Course type is next scheduled.
+*<b>Add Employee to Event Waiting List</b> - allows the User to add the Employee to an Event Waiting when a Course is scheduled.
+*<b>New Training Record – No Event</b> - allows the User to create a ‘One-Off’ Training Record for training activity completed by the Employee outside the business (no internal ‘Training Event’ was attended by the Employee, but they did attend/complete Training elsewhere).
+*<b>History</b> - displays the Training history related to that Mandatory Training Requirement. History Action for Content based Mandatory Training is available, in the "Rejected" Tab, which allows you to view the History or the Content - Acknowledgement / Rejection.
+*<b>Acknowledge</b> - only relevant to "Content" based Training Method. It allows the user to view and Accept or Reject the "Content". When the User Click on the Action Acknowledge, they have the option to Accept or Reject. They they Reject, the Record goes to the Rejected Tab.
+*<b>Reissue</b> - allows Manager and People and Culture User to Reissue Content that has been Rejected.
+*<b>Update </b> - allows the User to Update the Training Record by adding notes, attaching the completion certificate etc.
+*<b>Create Certificate/Licence </b> - where relevant, allows the User to create a Certificate/Licence based on/related to the Training completed by the Employee.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Statuses</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">
+*<b>Assigned</b>: This means that the Mandatory Training Requirement is assigned to the person, but it has not been Action. Action meaning the person has not bee placed onto a Wait List for a Course or Event (or Attendee List), or they have not had a Training Record created without a Wait List (new Training Record No Event). <br>
+*<b>Assigned Overdue</b>. This means that the Mandatory Training has not been Actioned for a week based on the creation date of the Mandatory Training requirement (Following it being Assigned). Action should be taken e.g. New Training No Event or place the person onto a Wait List for a Course or Event. <br>
+*<b>Renewal Required </b>These records will show with this status, if a Mandatory Training is recorded as needing to be renewed. The renewal can be based on the Renewal Date in the Mandatory Training Record. So if a Training Record is Mandatory and a renewal is recorded it will show up in both the Training Tab and also the Mandatory Training Tab. Renewals be be either annual or based on the selected parameter. <br>
+*<b>Completed </b> This will show if the one of Training Record has been recorded as completed. It will also show here if the person was put onto a Training Event and they attended the Event. Attendees will be assigned a completed Training Record / Mandatory Training.</font></td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+<br>
+Note: Mandatory Training Required is what is called a filtered record and will not show as a Completed Training record until there is an outcome for the Requirements which is a completed Training Record. From either creating a Training Record - No Event or attending a Training Event.
+===People & Culture - Training Widget – Training Records Folder===
+There are Four types of Training Records:
+*<b>One-Off Face-to-Face Training:</b> this relates to ad-hoc/one-off Training attended and completed by the Employee.
+*<b>Face-to-Face Training Course/Event:</b> this relates to Training scheduled and provided by the business and completed by the Employee.
+*<b>e-Learning:</b> if a third-party e-Learning App is installed, then e-Learning is Training is completed via the Subscribe-HR Training Widget.
+*<b>Content:</b> based on PDF's, Text Information or Videos that have been linked to Mandatory Training which can be Acknowledged or Rejected.
+The Training Records Folder contains all the current Training assigned to and completed by Employees. Training Records are not created until the Employee has completed the Training requirement (attended the Course Event, or completed the e-Learning Training).
+Once completed, People & Culture Users can, where relevant, create a Certificate/Licence based on the Training Record.
+===People & Culture - Training Widget – +Create New Training Record Wizard===
+People & Culture Users can also create 'Ad Hoc' Training Records. This option is available for Users/Organisations that don't send Employees on Training Courses/Events Managed via Subscribe-HR's Core-HR Training Solution. The Ad Hoc '+Create New Training Record' Wizard provides a more efficient way to create and keep track of Training Records and 'Requirements.'
+The '+Create New Training Record' Wizard is accessible via the 'Training Records' Tab of the Training Widget for People & Culture Users and Managers only (not Employees).
+===People & Culture - Training Widget – +Create New Training Record Wizard - Who Is This Request For?===
+&#9;1. Requesting for – the options are:
+*Myself - enables the User to create an Ad Hoc Training Record for themselves.
+*Team Member - enables the User to create an Ad Hoc Training Record for a Team Member.
+&#9;1. Team Member - appears if 'Team Member' selected in the previous/above field. Search and select the Team Member you're creating the Ad Hoc Training Record for.
+NOTE: People & Culture Users can create an Ad Hoc Training Record for anyone/all Employees in the organisation. Managers can only create Ad Hoc Training Records for their Team Members.
+Click "Next.'
+===People & Culture - Training Widget – +Create New Training Record Wizard - Job Training Guide===
+&#9;1. <b>Job Training Guide</b> - This Step in the Wizard displays the ‘Training Guide,’ which provides a summary of all the Training assigned to that Employee/Employee’s Job, which therefore makes that Training either a requirement or a suggestion for the Employee to complete. Click "Next.'
+===People & Culture - Training Widget – +Create New Training Record Wizard - Job Training Guide===
+&#9;1. <b>Mandatory Training Guide (non-editable)</b> – provides a list of the ‘Mandatory Training’ assigned to the ‘Job’ that the Employee holds (and therefore that the Employee is required to complete as part of their Employment)
+===People & Culture - Training Widget – +Create New Training Record Wizard - Training Record===
+&#9;1. <b>Course</b> – When creating an ‘Ad Hoc’ Training Record (that is a Training Record for Training completed outside of an officially run Course/Training Event via Subscribe-HR’s Core-HR Training features. E.G. by a third party provider, or for an historical Training Course that was completed in the past), Course = the name of the Course the Employee completed.
+<br>
+&#9;2. <b>Start Date</b> – the date when the Course started.
+<br>
+&#9;3. <b>Finish Date</b> – the date when the Course finished.
+<br>
+&#9;4. <b>Renewal Required</b> – if the Training needs to be repeated/renewed in the future, tick this box.
+<br>
+&#9;5. <b>Renewal Date</b> – a new ‘Training Requirement’ will be generated when this anniversary date is met. This will assign a new ‘Mandatory Training’ requirement (if ‘Mandatory for Job’ is ticked), or the same ‘Non-Mandatory’ Training requirement if ‘Mandatory for Job’ is not ticked):
+*If the Training requirement is ‘Mandatory’ – when the renewal date occurs, the ‘Requirement’ will appear in the Training Widget under ‘Mandatory Training’ Tab > ‘To Do’ Subtab.
+*If the Training requirement is ‘Non-Mandatory’ – when the renewal date occurs, the ‘Requirement’ will appear in the Training Widget under the ‘Training Records’ > Tab > ‘To Do’ Subtab.<br>
+&#9;6. <b>Notify Days Before Renewal</b> – a notification will go out to the Employee’s Manager when this date is reached.
+<br>
+&#9;7. <b>Training Reason</b> – Specify the reason for the Training. E.G. selecting ‘CPD’ will result in the Training Record appearing in the CPD Tab of the Training Widget.
+<br>
+&#9;8. <b>Status</b> – this is locked to ‘Completed’ for Ad Hoc Training Records (in progress training records will have to be created via the LHS (General > Core-HR > Employees > [Select Employee] > Training Records > Create New) menu.
+<br>
+&#9;9. <b>Mandatory for Job</b> – If checked/ticked, this Training Record will appear on the ‘Mandatory’ Tab of the Training Widget and be considered/classified as a ‘Mandatory Training Requirement’ for the Employee (until that requirement is completed/fulfilled by completing a Course/attending a live Course/Event).
+<br>
+&#9;10. <b>Type</b> – specify a Training type.
+<br>
+&#9;11. <b>Attachment</b> – add Attachment/s here (proof of completion for example).
+<br>
+&#9;12. <b>Notes</b> – use this field to record notes about the Training/Employee/attendance etc. Click "Next."
+<br>
+&#9;13. <b>Summary</b> – the final screen for the New Training Record Wizard is a summary of all your choices throughout the Wizard. Check and confirm that all the correct information has been captured. If you need to make changes, use “Previous” (bottom right of Wizard) to trace your steps back through the Wizard, and then use “Next” (bottom right of Wizard) to return to the final summary page once all changes have been made. When you’re ready to complete your "New Training Record Wizard" click “Submit.”
+<br>
+&#9;14. <b>Success</b> – if your New Training Record Wizard has been submitted correctly, you will see a success message. If not, you will see an error message. If you see an error message, please retrace your steps back through the Wizard and correct any issues. Otherwise, please contact support.
+<table border="1" width="100%" cellspacing="0">
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Field Name</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Description</b></font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Search</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This is a free text field that allows Users to filter the list based on specific keywords entered here.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>+ Create New Training Record</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Allows the User to create a new Training Record – either by creating a one-off Training Record, or by adding the Employee to a Course Waiting List.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>To Do Tab</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Displays the Training that has been assigned to an Employee, but not yet commenced.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>In Progress Tab</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Displays the Training that has been the Employee has started and is now in progress.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Completed Tab</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2"> Displays all the Training that has been completed by the Employee and for which a Training Record has now been created.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Did Not Attend Tab</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2"> Displays all the Face-to-Face Training the Employee was assigned/booked to attend, but did not. No Training Record is created if the Employee is scheduled but does not attend a Training Course/Event.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>All Tab</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2"> Displays all of the Training Records listed above.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Employee</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This column contains the Employee name that the Training is assigned to.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Course Name</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This column contains the Course Name that was assigned to the Employee – either as a Face-to-Face or e-Learning requirement.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Start Date</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This column contains the date the Course started.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">End Date</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This column contains the date the Course ended.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Type</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This column contains the type of Training assigned to the Employee. The options are:
+*Internal,
+*External.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Delivery Method </font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This column specifies if the Training requirement is e-Learning or Face-to-Face.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Actions</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2"> The options are:
+*<b>History</b> - displays the Training history related to that Training.
+*<b>Update </b> - allows the User to Update the Training Record by adding notes, attaching the completion certificate etc.
+*<b>Create Certificate/Licence </b> - where relevant, allows the User to create a Certificate/Licence based on/related to the Training completed by the Employee.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Statuses</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">
+*<b>Renewal Required</b>: This status shows if Training needs to be renewed based on the renewal parameters in the Training Record. E.g. Annually or other renewal date. If Training is Mandatory, and a Renewal is required, it will also show in the Mandatory Training Tab as requiring renewal/refresh. <br>
+*<b>Assigned Overdue</b> This status means that the Training renewal is older than 7 days from record creation and nothing has been done with the requirement. <br>
+*<b>Assigned </b> This is for e-Learning and Training that has been assigned. E.g. if Someone has been assigned e-learning from the Catalogue but the Course is not started is will be Assigned. This will also be used for Mandatory Training. When someone starts, the Mandatory Training Filtered Record is Assigned, in the "To Do" Tab.<br>
+*<b>Renewal Required Overdue</b> This Status shows if the Renewal of a Training Course has passed 30 Days. It becomes Overdue. <br>
+*<b>Booked</b> This is used for identifying people that are Booked onto a Training Event, but the Event start date has not been reached. This will show in the "To Do" Tab with the Status 'Booked.'</font></td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+===People & Culture - Training Widget – e-Learning Folder===
+If a third-party e-Learning App is installed, then the e-Learning Folder will appear in the Training Widget (if not, this Tab will be absent).
+The e-Learning Folder displays all e-Learning courses that have been assigned to Employees across one of four content Groups:
+*<b>General Training</b> - this Group contains standard e-Learning Training that all Employees must complete as part of the Employment.
+*<b> Induction Training</b> - this Group contains e-Learning Induction Training that is specific to the job the Employee holds.
+*<b> Mandatory Training</b> - this Group contains e-Learning Mandatory Training that is specific to the job the Employee holds.
+*<b> Job Training</b> - this Group contains e-Learning Job Training that is specific to the job the Employee holds.
+<b>NOTE:</b> Managers and People & Culture users are only able to ‘View’ e-Learning Courses that they have enrolled other Employees in. For Compliance reasons, Managers and People & Culture users can’t start/play the Course. The only e-Learning content they can play/start is content assigned to them.
+<table border="1" width="100%" cellspacing="0">
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Field Name</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Description</b></font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Search</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This is a free text field that allows Users to filter the list based on specific keywords entered here.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Assigned Tab</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This Tab displays all the e-Learning Courses that have been assigned to the Employee (that they’ve been enrolled in), but not yet started.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>In Progress Tab</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This Tab displays all the e-Learning Courses that the Employee has started (but not yet completed).</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Completed Tab</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This Tab displays all the e-Learning Courses that the Employee has completed.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Employee</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This column contains the Employee name that the e-Learning Training is assigned to.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Course Name</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This column contains the e-Learning Course name that has been assigned to the Employee.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Assigned Date </font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This column specifies the date that the e-Learning Course was assigned to the Employee.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Completed Date </font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This column specifies the date that the e-Learning Course was completed by the Employee.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Type</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This column contains the type of Training assigned to the Employee. The options are:
+*General Training.
+*Mandatory Training (this is Job specific).
+*Induction Training (this is Job specific).
+*Job Training (this is Job specific).</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Actions</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">The options are:
+*<b>Enrol</b> - allows the User to Enrol an Employee in a course.<br>
+*<b>Play</b> - allows the User to Play a course that has been assigned to them.<br>
+<b>NOTE:</b> for compliance reasons, only Employees can ‘Play’ e-Learning content via the ‘My Info’ Training Widget. Managers and People & Culture Users can’t ‘Play’ (or ‘Resume’) any e-Learning content assigned to other Employees.
+*<b>Start</b> - allows the User to start a course.<br>
+*<b>Resume </b> - allows the User to Resume a Course they’ve started, but haven’t yet finished.<br>
+*<b>History</b> - displays the Training history related to that Training.<br>
+*<b>Create Certificate/Licence </b> - where relevant, allows the User to create a Certificate/Licence based on/related to the e-Learning Training completed by the Employee.</font></td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+===People & Culture - Training Widget – e-Learning Catalogue Folder===
+If a third-party e-Learning App is installed, then the Online Training Catalogue Folder will appear in the Training Widget (if not, it will be absent).
+The e-Learning Catalogue Folder displays a list of all courses in the third-party e-Learning provider’s course catalogue. The content Table for this Tab will appear blank unless/until the User searches for content. After searching the e-Learning Catalogue using a keyword search, a list of relevant Training content will be displayed. Managers and People & Culture users can enrol Employees in Courses, or Employees can enrol themselves in a Course.
+Once an Employee is enrolled in a Course, that Course will appear under the e-Learning Folder on the ‘To Do’ Sub-Tab until the Employee starts/plays the Course, at which time it will move to the ‘In Progress’ Tab.
+<b>NOTE:</b> Managers and People & Culture users are only able to ‘View’ e-Learning Courses that they have enrolled other Employees in. For Compliance reasons, Managers and People & Culture Users can’t start/play the Course. The only e-Learning content they can play/start is content assigned to them.
+<table border="1" width="100%" cellspacing="0">
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Field Name</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Description</b></font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Search</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This is a free text field that allows Users to filter the list based on specific keywords entered here. Note: Users must enter a search term to generate a list of results in the Widget (otherwise this Tab will remain empty). </font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Course Name</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This column contains the name of the Course that is related to the search term used.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Description</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This column displays the thumbnail for the Course provided by the third-party e-Learning provider. Click on the thumbnail and a popup window appears including a Course description.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Type</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This column specifies the type of Course. The options are:
+*Video
+*Course.
+*Interactive.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Duration </font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This column displays the duration of the Course content, or the time it will take to completed the Course (both in minutes).</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Actions</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">
+*<b>Enrol Users</b> - allows the User to enrol other Employees to take this Course
+*<b>Enrol Me</b> - allows the User to enrol themselves to take this Course.</font></td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+===People & Culture - Training Widget – Training Catalogue Folder===
+The Training Catalogue Folder enables Users to create and manage Face-to-Face Courses run by the Organisation (either in-house or by an external third-party provider).
+<table border="1" width="100%" cellspacing="0">
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Field Name</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Description</b></font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Search</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This is a free text field that allows Users to filter the list based on specific keywords entered here. Note: Users must enter a search term to generate a list of results in the Widget (otherwise this Tab will remain empty). </font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>+ Create New Course</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Allows the User to create a new Face-to-Face Course type to be run by the Organisation (either in-house or by an external third-party provider). Employees can be added to a Course Waiting List, and when Courses meet minimum attendee requirements, a Course Event can be created and Employee confirmed to attend.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Course Name</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This column contains the name of the Training Course.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Max Attendee</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This column displays the maximum number of attendees allowed for that Course type.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Min Attendee</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This column displays the minimum number of attendees required to run a Face-to-Face event for that Course type.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Desired Attendee Count</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This column shows the desired level/number of attendees at which point the Course can be run as an Event.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Waiting List Count</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This column displays the current number of attendees wait listed for that Course type.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Actions:</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">
+*<b>Waiting List</b> - allows the User to view the Waiting List, enrol other Employees to take this Course type, or create a Course Event.
+*<b>Events</b> - allows the User to see all linked events for this Course type.
+*<b>Edit</b> - allows the User to edit information for this Course type.</font></td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+<br>
+Note: System e-mails will send to Employees, Managers and People and Culture users notifying of Course Wait List bookings.
+===People & Culture - Training Widget – Training Events Folder===
+The Training Events Folder enables Users to create and manage Face-to-Face Training Events run by the Organisation (either in-house or by an external third-party provider).
+<table border="1" width="100%" cellspacing="0">
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Field Name</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Description</b></font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Search</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This is a free text field that allows Users to filter the list based on specific keywords entered here. Note: Users must enter a search term to generate a list of results in the Widget (otherwise this Tab will remain empty). </font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>+ Create New Course Event</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Allows the User to create a new Face-to-Face Course Event to be run by the Organisation (either in-house or by an external third-party provider). Employees can be added to a Course Waiting List, and when Courses meet minimum attendee requirements, a Course Event can be created and Employee confirmed to attend.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Upcoming Tab</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Displays a list of all upcoming Course Events.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>In Progress Tab</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Displays a list of all Course Events currently in progress.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Completed Tab</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Displays a list of all completed Course Events.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>All Tab</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Displays a list of all Course Events related activity across the Organisation.</font></td>]
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Calendar</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Displays a calendar view of all Course Events across the Organisation.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Event Name</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This column contains the name of the Course Event.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Provider</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This column displays the Course Event Provider.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Start Date</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This column displays the start date of the Course Event.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Finish Date</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This column displays the finish date of the Course Event.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Actions:</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">
+*<b>Waiting List</b> - allows the User to add Employees to the Attendee List for this Course Event.
+*<b>Attendee List</b> - allows the User to see the Attendee List for this Course Event.
+*<b>Edit</b> - allows the User to edit information for this Course Event.</font></td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+<br>
+Note: System e-mails will send to Employees, Managers and People and Culture users notifying of Event Wait List bookings. They will also be sent if someone is moved from the Wait List to the Attendee List. As well as notifications being sent notifying of successful attendance of the Event, or No Show if the person was recorded as not showing up. There are buttons on the Attendee list. The "Invitation Button", will be available prior to the start date of the Training Event. The "No Show" and "Confirmation" buttons will show following the completion of the Training Event.
+===People & Culture - Training Widget – CPD Folder===
+The CPD (Continuing Professional Development) Folder provides a status of all the CPD Training for each Employee at a glance. People & Culture users can also view the CPD requirements for the Job that each Employee holds to see how much of their annual CPD Training requirement that Employee has completed.
+<table border="1" width="100%" cellspacing="0">
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Field Name</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Description</b></font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Search</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This is a free text field that allows Users to filter the list based on specific keywords entered here.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Points Dropdown/Filter</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Filter CPD Training Hours based on total points (options provided).</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Timeframe Dropdown/Filter</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Filter CPD Training Hours based on CPD points in a specified timeframe.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Employee</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This column contains the Employee name that the CPD Training is assigned to.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Current CPD</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This column contains the total current CPD hours the Employee has completed in the annual cycle. The annual cycle options are:
+*Calendar year (1 January to 31 December).
+*Financial year (1 July to 30 June).</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Total Required CPD</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This column contains the total annual CPD requirement for that Employee during the annual CPD cycle.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">CPD Training Cycle</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This column contains indicates the following:
+*If the Job that the Employee holds has a CPD Training Cycle (and Cycle timeframe) assigned then the Employee’s Job will appear in this column.
+*The CPD Training Cycle timeframe (from and to dates) will also appear (based on either the Calendar year or Financial year setting).
+**If there is no CPD Training Cycle assigned then a ‘No CPD Cycle’ message will appear.
+*If the Job assigned to the Employee as an ‘Annual CPD Target’ (number of hours) assigned, then the target number of hours will appear, in addition to the actual number of CPD hours the Employee has completed to so far (within the specified timeframe).</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Action:</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">
+*<b>View CPD Training Breakdown</b> - displays the Face-to-Face and e-Learning (if a third-party solution is integrated) CPD requirements for that Employee.</font></td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+===People & Culture - Training Widget – Skills Folder===
+The Skills Folder contains the current Skills that all Employees have been assessed for during a Performance Review Cycle, or which have been assigned/assessed on an Ad Hoc basis. A 'current' skill is defined as the 'most recent' record of a Skill that has been created/assigned to an Employee. The Employee may have 'previous' records of assignment/assessment for a particular Skill (for example if they were assessed for that Skill in a previous/older Performance Review Cycle). Older versions of Skills are not displayed in the Tab and can be found via the Employee's Skills record in Performance Management.
+People & Culture Users are the only Users who can create 'Ad Hoc' Skills (outside of a Performance Review Cycle) for Employees. However, if there is a 'Performance Review Cycle' (Cycles or Start Date-based) activated in the System, the '+Create New' option on the Skills Tab will be deactivated. Users can only create Skills using one method or the other (not both at the same time).
+When enrolling Employees in Courses, Events or e-Learning based on 'Skills' - the Skill/s will be 'matched' to Courses/Course Events. However, for e-Learning (if a third-party App is installed/integrated), the User will need to search the 'Catalogue' to find e-Learning Courses related to the Skilled then enrol Employees in an e-Learning Course.
+<table border="1" width="100%" cellspacing="0">
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Field Name</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Description</b></font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>+ Create Skill</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Top Right of the Widget. Starts the Skill Wizard, and allows the User to select a Skill from the 'Skills Library' and assign it to an Employee.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Search Keyword</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This is a free text field that you can use to search the Skill s Tab for an Employee name, or for a Skill Type.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Current Sub-Tab</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Displays the Skills that the Employee was assigned/assessed for during the current/most recent Performance Review Cycle.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Gaps Sub-Tab</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Displays the gap/s between the Skills that Job requires and the Skills that Employee currently does/does not have.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Employee</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This column contains the Employee name that the CPD Training is assigned to.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Skill Name</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">The name of the Skill assigned to/for which the Employee was assessed.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Date Created</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Displays the Date that the Skill was assigned to the Employee for assessment. Or, if the Skill was created Ad Hoc by a People & culture User (not via a Performance Review Cycle), the date the Skill was created/assigned to the Employee.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Linked Cycle</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">If the Skill was assigned to an Employee and assessed by the Employee/Manager as part of a Performance Review Cycle - a link to the most recent/current Performance Review Cycle will appear here. There will be a record for the Skill assessed by the Employee, and another for that Skill assessed by their Manager.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Score</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Displays the Score that the Assessor gave to the Employee for that Skill Type.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Date Created</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">The date the the Skill listed for the Employee was created.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Assessed By</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">The name of the Individual who assessed the Employee for that Skill Type.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Assessed Date</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Displays the Date that the Skill was assigned to the Employee and assessed (as part of a Performance Review Cycle).</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Skill Gap</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Specifies if the Employee has a 'Gap' for the Skill listed.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Required for Job</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Specifies Job that the 'Skill/Gap' relates to.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Actions</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Use this dropdown to action the following:
+*<b>Add Employee to Course Waiting List</b> - allows the User to add the Employee to the Course Waiting list so that they are then enrolled when an internal Training Event for that Course type is next scheduled.
+*<b>Add Employee to Event Waiting List</b> - allows the User to add the Employee to an Event Waiting when a Course is scheduled.
+*<b>Add Employee to e-Learning Course (Only when e learning is enabled)</b> - allows the User to add the Employee to an e-Learning Course relevant to the Skill/s Gap.
+*<b>Create Training Record</b> - allows the User to a Training Record for that Employee.</font></td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+==People & Culture - Talent Profile Widget==
+The Talent Profile widget contains summary information for all of the key areas of an Employee Talent based information. Including: Certificates and Licences, Goals, PDP, Catch-ups and so on. There is also a Summary View and PDF available which is located at the top right of the Talent Profile Widget. The Talent Profile Widget can work in conjunction with the Compliance Widget, Performance Widget and the Training Widget. The data listed in the Talent Profile Widget is an aggregation of all the data in these Widgets. There are functions within the Light Boxes to take the user to the respective widgets so that processing of data can occur. E.g. Certificate and Licences drill down - opens a light box which allows you to see all data, then you can open the widget for that data by clicking the button at the Top Left. This works regardless if the User has that widget in their Dashboard. People and Culture users can search any Employees to view the information available in the Talent Profile Widget.
+<table border="1" width="100%" cellspacing="0">
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Field Name</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Description</b></font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Certificates And Licences</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This number represents the number of <b>ACTIVE</b> Certificate and Licence Records. If you click on the Icon or Number a light Box will appear showing <b> ALL </b> Certificate and Licence records. Grouped by Active, Expiring and Expired. Click the "View Compliance Widget", button to be taken to the Compliance Widget - Full: Maximized View. Click Export PDF to export a PDF version of the data.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Background Checks</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This number represents the number of "Background Check" records for the Employee. If you click on the Icon or Number a light Box will appear showing <b>Past</b> Background Checks. Grouped by Past.  Click Export PDF to export a PDF version of the data.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Education And Qualifications</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This number represents the number of <b>ACTIVE</b> Education and Qualification Records. If you click on the Icon or Number a light Box will appear showing <b> ALL </b> Education and Qualifications records. Grouped by Active, Expiring and Expired. Click the "View Compliance Widget", button to be taken to the Compliance Widget - Full: Maximized View. Click Export PDF to export a PDF version of the data.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Training</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This number represents the number of Training Records. If you click on the Icon or Number a light Box will appear showing <b> ALL </b> Training records. Grouped by To-do, In Progress and Completed. Click the "View Training Widget", button to be taken to the Training Widget - Full: Maximized View. Click Export PDF to export a PDF version of the data.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Catch-ups</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This number represents the number of "Active and Upcoming" Catch-ups. If you click on the Icon or Number a light Box will appear showing <b>Active and Upcoming</b> Catch-ups. Grouped by Active and Upcoming. Click the "View Performance Widget", button to be taken to the Performance Widget - Full: Maximized View. Click Export PDF to export a PDF version of the data.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Acknowledgements</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This number represents the number of "Received and Sent" Acknowledgements. If you click on the Icon or Number a light Box will appear showing <b>Received and Sent</b> Acknowledgements. Grouped by Received and Sent. Click the "View Performance Widget", button to be taken to the Performance Widget - Full: Maximized View. Click Export PDF to export a PDF version of the data.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Work History</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This number represents the number of "Work History" records for the Employee. If you click on the Icon or Number a light Box will appear showing <b>Past</b> Work History. Grouped by Past.  Click Export PDF to export a PDF version of the data.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Goals</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This number represents the number of "Not Started, On Track, Behind, At Risk, Completed" Goals. If you click on the Icon or Number a light Box will appear showing <b>Not Started, On Track, Behind, At Risk, Completed</b> Goals. Grouped by Not Started, On Track, Behind, At Risk, Completed. Click the "View Performance Widget", button to be taken to the Performance Widget - Full: Maximized View. Click Export PDF to export a PDF version of the data. Click the "Update Status" button to update the "Goal" status.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Skills</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This number represents the number of "Current and Gaps" for Skills. If you click on the Icon or Number a light Box will appear showing <b>Current and Gap</b> Skills. Grouped by Current and Gap. Click the "View Performance Widget", button to be taken to the Performance Widget - Full: Maximized View. Click Export PDF to export a PDF version of the data. </font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Performance Score</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">There is no drilldown here. It just displays the most recent Performance Review Score. Based on how the formula being used in the Review. E.g. Average of all assessment criteria. Like Skills, Goals, Values and Behaviours. Click Export PDF to export a PDF version of the data.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Current PDP</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This will show the current PDP including current GOALS. You can update the status of the Goals by using the Update Status button. Click the "View Performance Widget", button to be taken to the Performance Widget - Full: Maximized View. Click Export PDF to export a PDF version of the data. The Employee and Manager have the ability to send a Summary on Weekly, Fortnightly or Monthly basis. The summary function will work within the Period of the PDP. To Cancel the Summary, Press Cancel. If you are an Employee you can choose to send a Summary to yourself and or your Manager. If the send summary is not on, it will say "Send Summary - Off". Goals can only be linked to a PDP, through the PDP step or through the Performance Review if a Performance Review / Cycle is Active. PDP can only be used if there is a PDP Step in the Performance Cycle - Review process. E-mail notifications for Reminders will be sent to the Subscribe-HR inbox and e-mail. Recipients can click on the URL to view the PDP in Subscribe-HR. NOTE the e-mails sent are system e-mails not workflow e-mails. Only S-HR developers can use manage these.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Next Review Date</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This will show the next review date for the Person. There is no Drill Down.</font></td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+====Talent Profile Summary PDF====
+The Talent Profile Summary contains the following Employee Summary Information. This Summary can be PDF'd. People and Culture users can PDF any Talent Profile summary for any Employee. Search the Talent Profile Widget for the Employee. Then View Summary and Export the Profile from there.
+<table border="1" width="100%" cellspacing="0">
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Field Name</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Description</b></font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">First Name and Surname</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Name of the Employee</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Photo</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Shows Photo of the Employee</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Role</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">The Role of the Employee</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Employee ID</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">The Indentification Number for the Employee which can be used to find the Employee in Subscribe-HR</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Department</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">The Department the Employee is in</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Location</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Location of the Employee</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Start Date</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">The Start Date of the Employee</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Manager</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">The Primary Manager of the Employee</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Length of Service</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">The time which the Employee has been employed</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Annual Leave Balance</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Current Balance for Annual Leave for the Employee</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Personal Leave Balance</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Current Balance for Personal Leave for the Employee</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Roles</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Lists the Roles of the Employee. Current Role/Job is at the Top. Dates Represent the Start and End Date for the Roles/Jobs</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Work History</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">List of Previous Jobs prior to Employment with your Company. This information could have been entered during the Recruitment Process and or it is stored against the Employee - Work History Sub Folder.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Certificates and Licences</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">List of Current Certificates and Licence Records. This information could have been entered during the Recruitment Process and or it is stored against the Employee - Certificates and Licences Sub Folder.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Background Checks</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">List of Current Background Check Records. This information could have been entered during the Recruitment Process and or it is stored against the Employee - Background Check Sub Folder</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Education and Qualifications</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">List of Active Education and Qualifications Records. This information could have been entered during the Recruitment Process and or it is stored against the Employee - Education and Qualifications Sub Folder</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Acknowledgements</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">List of received Acknowledgements.This information comes from the Performance Widget - Process</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Top Right - Reviews</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Shows current Review which is active. It shows the Progress of the current review. Shows the Final Score. Shows Next Review Date if there is one</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Skills</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Shows Current Skills. No Scores</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Goals</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Shows Current Goals. No Scores. Shows the Status of the Goals</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Export PDF Button</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Bottom Left of Screen. Allows you to <b>Export</b> the PDF to Print. Save to Desktop.</font></td>
+</tr>
+</table>
 ==People & Culture - Performance Management Widget==
@@ Line 468: / Line 1,368: @@
 This widget allows for Users to quickly and easily manage Performance through each of the following processes by clicking on the relevant “Folder”:
-*<b>Reviews</b> - create/manage Performance Reviews and Performance Workflow process/es.
+*<b>Reviews</b> - view/create/manage Performance Reviews and Performance Workflow process/es.
-*<b>Goals</b> - create/manage Employee Goals related to the Performance Review and Performance Workflow process/es.
+*<b>Goals</b> - view/create/manage Employee Goals related to the Performance Review and Performance Cycles, (or those created on a one-off/ad hoc basis). Goals can be linked to Business Objectives also. Completed Goals can also be brought into a current Goal Define step to be used again in a Review.
-*<b>Catch Ups</b> - create/manage Catch Ups related to the Performance Review and Performance Workflow process/es.
+*<b>Catch-Ups</b> - view/create/manage Catch-Ups related to the Performance Review and Performance Cycles, (or those created on a one-off/ad hoc basis).
+*<b>Acknowledgements</b> - view/create/manage Acknowledgements related to the Performance Review and Performance Cycles, (or those created on a one-off/ad hoc basis).
+*<b>Skills</b> - view/create/manage Skills related to the Performance Review and Performance Cycles, (or those created on a one-off/ad hoc basis).
-In each of these Folders, there are a series of "Tabs" that provide different functionality for managing Performance Reviews and Performance Workflows (related to Reviews). Within each Tab, there is a table that contains different columns. The Folders, Tabs, and Columns are explained below.
+In each of these Folders, there are a series of 'Tabs' that provide different functionality for managing Performance Reviews and Performance Review Cycles (related to Reviews). Within each Tab, there is a table that contains different columns. The Folders, Tabs, and Columns are explained below.
 From within the Performance Management Widget itself, there are a series of buttons (that launch Wizards) related to creating or managing Performance Reviews, or specifying and activating Performance Review Cycles. These Wizards include:
@@ Line 481: / Line 1,383: @@
 *<b>Send Review</b> - allows HR/P&C Managers to create and send a new Performance Management Review.
 *<b>Stop Review Process</b> - allows HR/P&C Managers to stop the Performance Review process currently being used and choose the other option (swap between Cycles/Start Date).
-*<b>+ Create Goal</b> - allows HR/P&C Managers to create Goals for all Employees. New Goals can also be created from the [[New-Goals|Employee Goal Wizard]] (coming soon) which is available via the Wizards "START" menu.
+*<b>+ Create Goal</b> - allows HR/P&C Managers to create Goals for all Employees. New Goals can also be created from the [[New-Goals|Employee Goal Wizard]] which is available via the Wizards "START" menu. Goals can be linked to Business Objectives also.
-*<b>+ Create Catch Up</b> - allows HR/P&C Managers to create Catch-Ups for all Employees. New Catch Ups can also be created from the [[New-Catch-Up-Wizard|Catch Up Wizard]] (coming soon) which is available via the Wizards "START" menu.
+*<b>+ Create Skills</b> - allows HR/P&C Managers to create Skills for all Employees. Skills are linked to Jobs or Employees.
+*<b>+ Create Catch-Up</b> - allows HR/P&C Managers to create Catch-Ups for all Employees. New Catch Ups can also be created from the [[New-Catch-Up-Wizard|Catch Up Wizard]] (coming soon) which is available via the Wizards "START" menu.
 These Widgets can be moved around in the Dashboard. They can also be removed from the Dashboard. This can be done in Maintenance --> Groups --> Permissions --> Select a Group and Go to the Widgets.
+===People & Culture - Performance Management Widget – Review Cycle Wizard for Cycles based Performance Reviews===
-===How to use the Review Cycle Wizard for Cycle based Performance Reviews===
+How to use the Performance Review Cycle Wizard for ‘Cycle’ based Performance Reviews:<br>
+&#9;1. Click on "Select Review Process" button which is located on the top right corner of the Performance Management Widget. If a Review Cycle is already in progress, you will instead see a red "Stop Review Process" button which enables you to stop/cancel the current Review Cycle being used and select another option by following the instructions below.<br>
-&#9;1. Click onto "Select Review Process" button which is located on the top right corner of the Performance Management widget. If a Review Process is already being used, you will instead see a red "Stop Review Process" button which enables you to stop the current Review Process being used and select another option by following the instructions below.
+&#9;2. A lightbox will appear prompting you to select from a dropdown the Review type. Select "Based on Cycle." <br>
-<br>
+&#9;3. Click "Submit." <br>
-&#9;2. A lightbox will appear prompting you to select from a dropdown the review type. Select "Based on Cycle."
+&#9;4. The System will take you back to the Performance Management Widget. "Current Review Method = (Cycles)" with a green "On" status will display on the top right of the widget. NOTE: you must click "On" again, which will open another popup, and then select "Activate" to activate that Review Cycle type (this step must be completed for the remainder of the process to work).<br>
-<br>
+&#9;5. To create a 'Cycle' based Performance Review, click on "Create Review."<br>
-&#9;3. Click "Submit."
+&#9;6. A popup appears confirming the review method being created is based on 'Cycles.’ Click "Delete" to remove the 'Cycle' method. Otherwise click "Activate" to turn it on and start sending Reviews.<br>
-<br>
+&#9;7. You can now click "Send Review" to send a new Performance Review based on Cycles. This will guide the User through the "New Performance Review" Wizard. The Cycles Wizard the following to be specified:<br>
-&#9;4. The system will take you back to the Performance Management widget. "Current Review Method = (Cycles)" with a green "ON" status will display on the top right of the widget. NOTE: you must click "on" again, which will open another lightbox, and then select "Activate" to activate that Review Cycle type (this step must be completed for the remainder of the process to work).
+*Name: the name of the Performance Review.
-<br>
+*Template: select the Performance Review Canvas that will be used for the Review. This needs to have been set up prior to creating the Performance Review.
-&#9;5. To start creating a 'Cycle' based performance review, click on "Create Review."
+*Workflow: select the Performance Cycle/Workflow. This needs to have been set up prior to creating the Performance Review.
-<br>
+*Copy From Previous Review: you can choose to copy Skills and/or Behaviours from a previous review. Note that Goals from previous Reviews and Ad Hoc that have not yet been completed are copied over by default.<br>
-&#9;6.  A lightbox appears confirming the review method being created is based on 'Cycles'. Click "Delete" to remove the 'Cycle' method. Otherwise click "Activate" to turn it on and start sending reviews.
-<br>
-&#9;7.  You can now click "Send Review" to send a new Performance Review based on Cycles. This will guide the User through the "New Performance Review" Wizard. The Cycles Wizard will require to specify the following:
-*<b>Name</b> - the name of the performance review.
-*<b>Template</b> - select the Performance Canvas that will be used for the Review.
-*<b>Workflow</b> - select the Performance Workflow.
-*<b>Copy From Previous Review</b> - you can choose to copy Skills and/or Behaviours from a previous review. Note that Goals are copied over by default.
 *Review Cycle Scope:
-**<b>Employees</b> - allows the User to specify which Employee/s the Review will be sent to as part of the Review Cycle.
+**<b>Employees</b>: allows the User to specify which Employee/s (all, or selected) the Review will be sent to as part of the Review Cycle.
-**<b>Groups</b> - allows the User to specify which Group/s the Review will be sent to as part of the Review Cycle.
+**<b>Groups</b>: allows the User to specify which Group/s the Review will be sent to as part of the Review Cycle.
-**<b>Departments</b> - allows the User to specify which Department/s the Review will be sent to as part of the Review Cycle.
+**<b>Departments</b>: allows the User to specify which Department/s the Review will be sent to as part of the Review Cycle.
-&#9;8.  You can remove the Cycle method by clicking onto "Stop Review Process." Confirmation will appear allowing you to cancel or the User can click "OK" to remove the method.
+&#9;8. People & Culture Users can remove the Cycle method by clicking on "Stop Review Process." Confirmation will appear allowing you to cancel, or the User can click "OK" to remove the method.<br>
+<b>NOTES:</b><br>
+&#9;1. If the Review Type (Cycles or Start based) is stopped and/or changed, any active Review/Cycles will remain active until all participants have completed that Review/Cycle.<br>
+&#9;2. The System only allows each Employee to have one active Performance Review/Cycle assigned to them at any given time.<br>
+&#9;4. If changing from a Cycles to Start Date based Cycle ‘Type’ – if an Employee still has a live Review/Cycle assigned to them at the date when their start date anniversary is reached, then they will not be assigned a Start Date Review/Cycle until their next Start Date (only after completion of the previously active Review/Cycle).<br>
+&#9;5. If a Review Type is cancelled and/or changed, it is recommended that the Review/Cycle is also cancelled (so that the new Review Type and any associated Review/Cycle is assigned to nominated Employees straight away.<br>
+&#9;6. If the Review Type and the Review/Cycle are not both cancelled at the same time, then point #3 above applies.
-===How to use the Wizard for Start based Performance Reviews===
-&#9;1. Click onto "Select Review Process" button which is located on the top right corner of the Performance Management Widget. If a Review Process is already being used, you will instead see a red "Stop Review Process" button which enables you to stop the current Review Process being used and select another option by following the instructions below.
+===People & Culture - Performance Management Widget – Review Cycle Wizard for Start Date based Performance Reviews===
-<br>
-&#9;2. A lightbox will appear prompting you to select from a dropdown the Review type. Select "Based on Start Date."
-<br>
-&#9;3. Click "Submit."
-<br>
-&#9;4. The System will take you back to the Performance Management Widget. "Current Review Method = (Start Date)" with a green "ON" status will displayed on the top right of the Widget. NOTE: you must click "on" again, which will open another lightbox, and then select "Activate" to activate that Review Cycle type (this step must be completed for the remainder of the process to work).
-<br>
-&#9;5. To start creating a 'Start Date' based Performance Review, click on "Create Review."
-<br>
-&#9;6. You will then be prompted to enter details for the Review. This includes:
-*<b>Name</b> - the name of the performance review.
-*<b>Template</b> - select the Performance Canvas that will be used for the Review.
-*<b>Workflow</b> - select the Performance Workflow.
-*<b>Copy From Previous Review</b> - you can choose to copy Skills and/or Behaviours from a previous review. Note that Goals are copied over by default.
-&#9;7. Once you are happy click "Activate" or "Delete" to remove the 'Start Date' method.
-<br>
-&#9;8. You can click "Stop Review Process" to remove the 'Start Date' method. Confirmation will appear allowing you to cancel or proceed.
-<br>
-===Performance Management Widget – + Create New Wizard===
+How to use the Performance Review Cycle Wizard for ‘Start Date’ based Performance Reviews:<br>
+&#9;1. Click onto "Select Review Process" button which is located on the top right corner of the Performance Management Widget. If a Review Cycle is already in progress, you will instead see a red "Stop Review Process" button which enables you to stop the current Review Process being used and select another option by following the instructions below. <br>
+&#9;2. A popup will appear prompting you to select from a dropdown the Review type. Select "Based on Start Date." <br>
+&#9;3. Click "Submit." <br>
+&#9;4. The System will take you back to the Performance Management Widget. "Current Review Method = (Start Date)" with a green "On" status will displayed on the top right of the Widget. NOTE: you must click "On" again, which will open another popup, and then select "Activate" to activate that Review Cycle type (this step must be completed for the remainder of the process to work).<br>
+&#9;5. To create a 'Start Date' based Performance Review, click on "Create Review." <br>
+&#9;6. You will then be prompted to enter details for the Review. This includes:<br>
+*Name: the name of the Performance Review.
+*Template: select the Performance Review Canvas that will be used as the main form for the Review. This needs to have been set up prior to creating the Performance Review.
+* Workflow: select the Performance Cycle definition. This needs to have been set up prior to creating the Performance Review.
+* Copy From Previous Review: you can choose to copy Skills and/or Behaviours from a previous review. Note that Goals from previous Reviews and Ad Hoc that have not yet been completed are copied over by default.
+&#9;7. When complete, click "Activate" or "Delete" to remove the 'Start Date' method.<br>
+&#9;8. You can click "Stop Review Process" to remove the 'Start Date' method. Confirmation will appear allowing you to cancel or proceed.
-&#9;1. Click "Create Review" (Start Date based Reviews) or "Send Review" (Cycles based Reviews) which is located on the top right-hand corner of the Performance Management widget. This will open the Performance Review Wizard, which allows HR/P&C Managers to create Performance Review Workflows based on the Review type selected (Cycles Versus Start Date).
+<b>NOTES:</b><br>
-<br>
+&#9;1. If the Review Type (Cycles or Start based) is stopped and/or changed, any active Review/Cycles will remain active until all participants have completed that Review/Cycle.<br>
-&#9;2. For Cycles Based Reviews input the following information:
+&#9;2. The System only allows each Employee to have one active Performance Review/Cycle assigned to them at any given time.<br>
-*<b>Name</b> – name the Performance Review.
+&#9;3. If changing from a Cycles to Start Date based Cycle ‘Type’ – if an Employee still has a live Review/Cycle assigned to them at the date when their start date anniversary is reached, then they will not be assigned a Start Date Review/Cycle until their next Start Date (only after completion of the previously active Review/Cycle).<br>
-*<b>Template</b> – click in the Template field (or start typing) to trigger the menu of Performance Reviews currently available in the System. Select the Performance Canvas/Review that will be used for this Performance Review.
+&#9;4. If a Review Type is cancelled and/or changed, it is recommended that the Review/Cycle is also cancelled (so that the new Review Type and any associated Review/Cycle is assigned to nominated Employees straight away.<br>
-*<b>Workflow - click in the Workflow field</b> (or start typing) to trigger the menu of Performance Workflows currently available in the System. Select the Performance Workflow that will be used for this Performance Review.
+&#9;5. If the Review Type and the Review/Cycle are not both cancelled at the same time, then point #3 above applies.
-*<b>Copy From Previous Review</b> - you can choose to copy Skills and/or Behaviours from a previous review. Note that Goals are copied over by default.
-*<b>Select Recipients</b> – specify which Employee/s, Group/s, or Department/s you want to send the Performance Review to. The options available are:
-*<b>Employees</b> – click in the Employees field (or start typing) to trigger the menu of Employees. Select the Employee/s (one or multiple) who will be sent this Performance Review.
+===People & Culture - Performance Management Widget – + Create New Wizard ===
-*<b>Groups</b> – click in the Groups field (or start typing) to trigger the menu of Groups. Select the Group/s (one or multiple) that will be sent this Performance Review.
-*<b>Department</b> – click in the Department field (or start typing) to trigger the menu of Departments. Select the Department/s (one or multiple) that will be sent this Performance Review.
+The "Create Review" (Start Date based Reviews) or "Send Review" (Cycles based Reviews) button/s (which are located on the top right-hand corner of the Performance Management widget) starts the process of creating a new Performance Review. This will open the Performance Review Wizard, which allows People & Culture Users to create Performance Reviews based on the Review type selected (Cycles Versus Start Date) and send those Reviews to Employees.
-*<b>Sample PDF</b> in the bottom left-hand corner of the popup window, there is a red button “Sample PDF.” Please download a copy of the Sample PDF, check it to confirm that it contains all the information you want to include in your Performance Review. If there is anything missing, repeat previous steps. When you are happy with the Sample PDF ‘tick’ the “I have checked the sample PDF template” checkbox. Click “Next.”
-*<b>When to Send</b> – click on the downwards pointing arrow (right-hand side of the popup window) to open the dropdown list. Choose between sending ‘Now’ or ‘Later.’
+For Cycles Based Reviews input the following information:<br>
-*<b>Send Date</b> – if you select ‘Later,’ a date field will appear. Click on the calendar on the far right and specify the date and time you want to trigger the send of the Performance Review.
+&#9;1. Name: name the Performance Review.<br>
-*<b>Frequency</b> – click on the downwards pointing arrow (right-hand side of the popup window) to open the dropdown list. Choose between sending ‘Once’ or ‘Indefinite.’
+&#9;2. Template: click in the Template field (or start typing) to trigger the menu of Performance Reviews currently available in the System. Select the Performance Canvas/Review that will be used for this Performance Review.<br>
-*<b>Requires Approval</b> – specify if this Performance Review requires approval by ticking the checkbox. Click “Next.”
+&#9;3. Workflow: click in the Workflow field (or start typing) to trigger the menu of Performance Cycles/Workflows currently available in the System. Select the Performance Cycle/Workflow that will be used for this Performance Review.<br>
-*<b>Email Template</b> – you will also be shown a draft of the Standard System Template email that will be sent to each Employee nominated in the previous step/s. If you want to change any of the content in the template, you can do so using the wysiwyg editor. Click “Next.”
+&#9;4. Copy From Previous Review: Users can choose to copy Skills and/or Behaviours from a previous Review. Note that all Goals that were assigned to the Employee as part of the Goals ‘Define’ Step in any previous Review, or that have been created ‘Ad Hoc’ (since/after the ‘Define’ Step was completed) are copied over/included by default. An Employee’s Goals that have already been completed will not be included, but can be added back into an assessment/rating/s Step if needed. Values, if set up in the System, will also be included in the assessment/ratings Step automatically.<br>
-*<b>Summary</b> – the final screen for the Performance Review Wizard is a summary of all your choices throughout the Wizard. Check and confirm that all the correct information has been captured. If you need to make changes, use “Previous” (bottom right of Wizard) to trace your steps back through the Wizard, and then use “Next” (bottom right of Wizard) to return to the final summary page once all changes have been made. When you’re ready to send your Performance Review & Workflow to the nominated Employee/s click “Submit.”
+&#9;5. Select Recipients – specify which Employee/s, Group/s, or Department/s you want to send the Performance Review to. The options available are:<br>
-&#9;3. For Start Date Based Reviews input the following information:
+*Employee/s: click in the Employees field (or start typing) to trigger the menu of Employees. Select the Employee/s (all, one or multiple) who will be sent this Performance Review.
-*<b>Name</b> – name the Performance Review.
+*Group/s: Select the Group/s (one or multiple) that will be sent this Performance Review.
-*<b>Template</b> – click in the Template field (or start typing) to trigger the menu of Performance Reviews currently available in the System. Select the Performance Canvas/Review that will be used for this Performance Review.
+*Department/s: Select the Department/s (one or multiple) that will be sent this Performance Review.
-*<b>Workflow - click in the Workflow field</b> (or start typing) to trigger the menu of Performance Workflows currently available in the System. Select the Performance Workflow that will be used for this Performance Review.
+&#9;6. Sample PDF in the bottom left-hand corner of the popup window, there is a red button “Sample PDF.” Please download a copy of the Sample PDF and check it to confirm that it contains all the information you want to include in your Performance Review. If there is anything missing, repeat previous steps. If the Sample PDF is accurate/complete, ‘tick’ the “I have checked the sample PDF template” checkbox.<br>
-*<b>Copy From Previous Review</b> - you can choose to copy Skills and/or Behaviours from a previous review. Note that Goals are copied over by default.
+&#9;7. When to Send: click on the downwards pointing arrow (right-hand side of the popup window) to open the dropdown list. Choose between sending ‘Now’ or ‘Later.’<br>
-*Click "Activate."
+&#9;8. Send Date: if you select ‘Later,’ a date field will appear. Click on the calendar on the far right and specify the date and time you want to trigger the send of the Performance Review.<br>
+&#9;9. Frequency: Choose between sending ‘Once’ or ‘Indefinite.’ 'Indefinite‘ will repeatedly send the Review on the anniversary of the initial send date unless/until cancelled.<br>
+&#9;10. Upon Submission, all Employees, Groups or Departments nominated will then be sent that Review based on the ‘When to Send’ (‘Now’ or date) specified.<br>
+For Start Date Based Reviews input the following information:<br>
+&#9;1. Name: name the Performance Review.<br>
+&#9;2. Template: click in the Template field (or start typing) to trigger the menu of Performance Reviews currently available in the System. Select the Performance Canvas/Review that will be used for this Performance Review.<br>
+&#9;3. Workflow: click in the Workflow field (or start typing) to trigger the menu of Performance Cycles/Workflows currently available in the System. Select the Performance Cycle/Workflow that will be used for this Performance Review.<br>
+&#9;4. Copy From Previous Review: Users can choose to copy Skills and/or Behaviours from a previous Review. Note that all Goals that were assigned to the Employee as part of the Goals ‘Define’ Step in any previous Review, or that have been created ‘Ad Hoc’ (since/after the ‘Define’ Step was completed) are copied over/included by default. An Employee’s Goals that have already been completed will not be included, but can be added back into an assessment/rating/s Step if needed. Values, if set up in the System, will also be included in the assessment/ratings Step automatically.<br>
 Upon Activation, all Employee will then be sent that Review on the anniversary of their Start Date with your Organisation.
-===Performance Management Widget – Reviews Folder===
+===People & Culture - Performance Management Widget – Goals Tab: + Create Goal Wizard ===
+People & Culture Users, Managers and Employees can create 'Ad Hoc' Goals (outside of a Performance Review Cycle). Goals created/assigned as part of a Performance Review Cycle will appear in and be assessable as part of the Review Cycle in which they were created. Ad Hoc Goals will be included in any subsequent Performance Review Cycles (assuming that Goals are Defined/Assessed (rated) as part of the Performance Review).
+Managers can create ‘Ad Hoc’ Goals for their direct reports throughout the year. These Goals will appear in the ‘Goals’ Step of subsequent Review Cycles/Performance Reviews for the Employee to whom the Goal was assigned (if there is a ‘Define Goals’ or ‘Ratings’ Step included).
+People & Culture Users can create ‘Ad Hoc’ Objectives/Goals for all Employees throughout the year. These Objectives/Goals will appear in the ‘Goals’ Step of subsequent Review Cycles/Performance Reviews for the Employee to whom the Goal was assigned (if there is a ‘Define Goals’ or ‘Ratings’ Step included).
+<b>Note:</b> if a Goal is assigned to an Employee, either as part of the ‘Define’ Step in a Review Cycle, or on an ‘Ad Hoc’ basis, and that Goal is ‘completed’ – it will no longer continue to appear in the Goal Define/Rate Step of subsequent Review Cycle Steps. However, it is possible to ‘add’ the Goal back into the Define/Rate Step if required (so that the Employee and/or Manager can rate the Employee’s performance per that Goal).
+To create a Goal input the following information:<br>
+&#9;1. Employee: Select the Employee to create the Goal for (if creating it for someone else). <br>
+&#9;2. Business Objectives: select a Business Objective from the dropdown menu. <br>
+&#9;3. Goal Type: select the Goal type from the dropdown menu. <br>
+&#9;4. Goal Name: specify a Goal name. <br>
+&#9;5. Description: provide a description of the Goal. <br>
+&#9;6. Target Date of Completion: specify a target date for the completion of the Goal. <br>
+&#9;7. Goal Completed Date: specify the actual date the Goal was completed/achieved (this can be completed at a future point in time). <br>
+&#9;8. Notes: add notes regarding the Goal including feedback, process, experience etc. if required.
+&#9;9. Goal Status: specify the status of the Goal. Click “Next." <br>
+&#9;10. Summary: the final screen for the Employee Goal Wizard is a summary of all your choices throughout the Wizard. Check and confirm that all the correct information has been captured. If you need to make changes, use “Previous” (bottom right of Wizard) to trace your steps back through the Wizard, and then use “Next” (bottom right of Wizard) to return to the final summary page once all changes have been made. When you’re ready to complete the Goal, click “Submit.” <br>
+&#9;11. Success: if your Employee Goal Wizard has been submitted correctly, you will see a success message. If not, you will see an error message. If you see an error message, please retrace your steps back through the Wizard and correct any issues. Otherwise, please contact support. <br>
+===People & Culture - Performance Management Widget – Skills Tab: + Create Skill Wizard ===
+People & Culture Users are the only Users who can create 'Ad Hoc' Skills (outside of a Performance Review Cycle) for Employees. However, if there is a 'Performance Review Cycle' (Cycles or Start Date-based) activated in the System, the '+Create New' option on the Skills Tab of both the Performance Management and the Training Widgets will be deactivated (even for People & Culture Users). Users can only create Skills using one method or the other – as part of the ‘Define step’ of a Performance Review, or ad hoc (not both at the same time).
+To create a Skill input the following information: <br>
+&#9;1. Employee: Select the Employee to create the Goal for (Self or Team Member). <br>
+&#9;2. Skill: select the Skill from the dropdown menu. <br>
+&#9;3. Assessed by: specify who can validate/has assessed the Skill to be assigned to the Employee. <br>
+&#9;4. Score: Provide a ‘Score’ for the Skill. <br>
+&#9;5. Current: confirm if the Skill is current or not. <br>
+&#9;6. Summary: the final screen for the Employee Skill Wizard is a summary of all your choices throughout the Wizard. Check and confirm that all the correct information has been captured. If you need to make changes, use “Previous” (bottom right of Wizard) to trace your steps back through the Wizard, and then use “Next” (bottom right of Wizard) to return to the final summary page once all changes have been made. When you’re ready to complete the Skill, click “Submit.” <br>
+&#9;7. Success: if your Employee Skill Wizard has been submitted correctly, you will see a success message. If not, you will see an error message. If you see an error message, please retrace your steps back through the Wizard and correct any issues. Otherwise, please contact support. <br>
+NOTE: Ad hoc Skills can’t/won’t be added to a subsequent Performance Review/Cycle (for Rating/Assessment).
+===People & Culture - Performance Management Widget – Catch-Ups Tab: + Create Catch-Up Wizard ===
+The Catch-Up Wizard allows Users to create a Catch-Up with other Employees in the following ways:
+*Manager to Employee.
+*Employee to Manager.
+*People & Culture to Manager or Employee (essentially all Users).
+<table border="1" width="100%" cellspacing="0">
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Field Name</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Description</b></font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>+ Create Catch-Up</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">People & Culture User can create Catch-Ups with all Employees - between the Employee and P&C User. New Catch Ups can also be created from the [[New-Catch-Up-Wizard|Catch Up Wizard]] which is available via the Wizards "START" menu.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Search</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This is a free text field that allows user to filter down the list to specific keywords entered here.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Active Tab</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Clicking this Tab will display all currently active Performance Goals. The number in brackets displays the total number of active Goals.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Upcoming Tab</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Clicking this Tab will display Catch-Ups that are yet to happen at a future date.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Cancelled Tab</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Clicking this Tab will display the Cancelled Catch-Ups. Use the Action: Cancel Reason, to see the reason the Catch-Up was Cancelled.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Completed Tab</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Clicking this Tab will display all completed Performance Goals. The number in brackets displays the total number of completed Goals.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Topic</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">The relevant topic of the Catch Up will be displayed here.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Employee</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">The name of the Employee that this Catch-Up has been assigned to.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Catch Up Date</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">The date of the Catch-Up will be displayed here. If the Catch-Up has been rescheduled, Rescheduled from Text and the Date it was rescheduled from will show next to this Date: Time.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Next Catch-up</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Select the date of the next Catch-Up if you want to schedule one for the future.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Comments/Notes/Questions</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Free type text here.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Attachments</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Link attachments here. <br>
+NOTE: Both participants in the Catch-Up can upload additional attachments (after the initial creation of the Catch-Up) as part of the ongoing Catch-Up 'Conversation'). </font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Actions</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This dropdown allows user to perform either of the following:<br>
+*<b>Reply</b> - Use this option to Start the conversation for the Catch Up.<br>
+*<b>Edit</b> - Use this option to Edit the Catch-Up.<br>
+*<b>Complete Catch-Up</b> - Use this option to reply to the conversation.<br>
+*<b>Create Next Catch-Up</b> - Use this option to create a follow-up Catch Up.
+*<b>Reschedule</b> - Use this option to "Reschedule" the Catch-Up.
+*<b>Cancel</b> - Use this option to "Cancel" the Catch Up. Reason for Cancelling is entered. The Reason will then show in the Cancel Tab: Action - Cancel Reason.
+*<b>Cancel Reason</b> - Use this option to "View" the "Cancel Reason".</font></td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+===People & Culture - Performance Management Widget – Reviews Folder===
 Within the Reviews Folder, there are a series of “Tabs” where HR/P&C Managers can manage the Performance Reviews of Employees. Those Tabs are:
@@ Line 640: / Line 1,655: @@
 <tr>
 <td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Current Step </font></td>
-<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">The current step of the Performance Review process that Employee is currently at will be displayed here.</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">The current step of the Performance Review process that Employee is currently at will be displayed here. Clicking on the name of the 'Step' will display an outline of all the steps in the Review Cycle. If the current step is a Peer Review step, another link will appear here that, when clicked, will show the status of each individual Peer (indicating whether the Peer has completed the Step or not).</font></td>
 </tr>
 <tr>
@@ Line 685: / Line 1,700: @@
 <tr>
 <td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Action</font></td>
-<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Open Review</b> - allows Users to open and complete current performance step<br>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">The options are:
-<b>Reopen Step</b> - allows Users to reopen completed task on a completed step. This will display a popup with responder names. Simply tick the relevant step for the relevant responder.<br>
+*<b>Open Review:</b> Allows Users to open and complete the current performance step (if the current Step is assigned to them. If the current Step is assigned to someone else/the other respondent in the Performance Review Cycle Step, then the User will see a message that says ‘You do not have permissions to access this Step.’ If you see this message it means that the current Step in the Review Cycle belongs to the other participant and only they can complete the next Step.
-<b>Force Start Next Step</b> - allows Users to force start the next step.<br><b>Delete</b> - allows Users to delete the employee performance review.<br>
+*<b>Reopen Step:</b> Only applies if/when both Manager & Employee are completing a step concurrently, and/or if multiple Peers are completing a step concurrently. Only tasks, which have already been completed on a currently/still open (as in not yet ‘completed’) Step, can be reopened. If a Step has been completed by all participants, it can no longer be reopened. Reopening a Step will display a popup with responder names. Simply tick the relevant step for the relevant responder.
-<b>View Review Report</b> - allows Users to view the report Performance Review Report for that Employee.<br>
+*<b>Change Step Opening Date:</b> Allows Users to change the opening date of the next Step in the Review Cycle, if that date is in the future.
-<b>Manage Peers</b> - allows Users to manage peers if there is a "Define Step - Peers" and the review is not yet completed.<br>
+*<b>Extend Review Due Date: </b> if the 'Due In' period for the current step has expired, this option can be used to move the expiry forward (in the future) so that the Step reopens and can be completed by the User for whom the Step was locked because the 'Due Date' was passed.
-<b>Create Review Cycle (No Review Tab)</b> - top right link will be activated if review method is based on 'Cycles'. Selecting employees and clicking this link will auto select selected employees to send the Review to. Action link allows sending a performance review to a single user.<br>
+*<b>View Review Report: </b> Allows Users to view the Performance Review Report for that Employee only. This Report displays the Average Scores for each of the options rated (Skills, Values, Goals, Behaviours – if included in the Review Cycle) and the overall Performance Review Score in both draft/final versions for an individual Employee only. The System does not generate a Report that includes the Averages and the Overall Performance Review Score for all Employees in a single consolidated view. Managers can see Reports for their own direct reports. People & Culture Users can see individual Reports for all Employees.
-<b>Cancel Review Send (Review Cycle Tab)</b> - cancel sent employee performance review.<br>
+**Note:
-<b>Send Comms (Review Cycle Tab)</b> - send communications regarding sending this Review Cycle.<br>
+***The individual Reports can take up to 24 hours to generate results. If the Report is still in the process of being generated, you will see a message advising you that this is the case.
-<b>View Reporting (Review Cycle Tab)</b> - view reporting for this particular Review Cycle.<br>
+***The consolidated Report (that contains the results for all Employees who are completing the Performance Review) can also take up to 24 hours to generate results. If the Report is still in the process of being generated, you will see a message advising you that this is the case.
-<b>Summary (Review Cycle Tab)</b> - view view a Summary of all the Reviews related to that specific Review Cycle.</font></td>
+*<b>Manage Peers: </b> Allows Users to manage Peers if there is a "Define Step - Peers" and the Review is not yet completed.
+*<b>+Create Review (No Review Tab): </b> This option will be available if the active review method is 'Cycles' based. Selecting this ‘Action’ for an Employee will send a Performance Review Cycle to a single User. To send a Review to an individual Employee – first tick the check box to the left of the Employee’s name.
+*<b>Cancel Review (Cycle Tab): </b> Cancels the selected Performance Review Cycle (and all associated canvases/forms sent to Employees as part of that Review Cycle).
+*<b>Send Comms (Cycle Tab): </b> Sends communications to all participants regarding this Review Cycle.
+*<b>View Reporting (Cycle Tab): </b> View summary/overall reporting for this specific Performance Review Cycle. When you choose this action, you have the option to select/view the summary/overall results for each of the canvases in that specific Performance Review Cycle. This step detects canvases that have question types and assessment scores for Skills, Values, Goals and Behaviours. It will only display those Results types.
+</font></td>
 </tr>
 </table>
-===Performance Management Widget – Goals Folder===
-Within the Goals Folder, there are a series of “Tabs” where HR/P&C Managers can manage the Goals of Employees. Those Tabs are:
+====People & Culture - Performance Management – Advanced Performance Management Reports====
-*Active.
-*Completed.
+The following Advanced Reports are available as ‘Standard’ in Subscribe-HR: <br>
-*Overdue
+&#9;1. Skills Audit by Department: Showing Employee Skills by Department and the latest Review Score. Self and Manager assessment. Based on the most recent/last Performance Review. <br>
+&#9;2. Goals Audit by Department: Showing Employee Skills by Department and the latest Review Score. Self and Manager. Based on the most recent/last Performance Review. <br>
+Values Audit by Department: Showing Employee Skills by Department and the latest Review Score. Self and Manager assessment. Based on the most recent/last Performance Review. <br>
+&#9;3. Behaviour Audit by Department: Showing Employee Skills by Department and the latest Review Score. Self and Manager assessment. Based on the most recent/last Performance Review. <br>
+&#9;4. Skills Final Score by Department: Showing the Average of Self and Manager Rating. Final Score per person by department. Based on the most recent/last Performance Review. <br>
+&#9;5. Goals Final Score by Department: Showing the Average of Self and Manager Rating. Final Score per person by department. Based on the most recent/last Performance Review. <br>
+&#9;6. Values Final Score by Department: Showing the Average of Self and Manager Rating. Final Score per person by department. Based on the most recent/last Performance Review. <br>
+&#9;7. Behaviours Final Score by Department: Showing the Average of Self and Manager Rating. Final Score per person by department. Based on the most recent/last Performance Review. <br>
+&#9;7. Final Score by Department: Showing average of skills goals values and behaviours – Final Score for all. <br>
+====People & Culture - Performance Management Widget – Review Cycle Consolidated Reports====
+Consolidated Reports for each Performance Review/Cycle are available via the Performance Management Widget > Reviews Tab > Cycle Subtab > Action > View Reporting.
+These Reports contain:
+*<b>Results Tab:</b> For Goals, Skills, Behaviours, and Values, the average Score entered for each assessable item by each type of Responder (Employee, Manager, Peer); for multiselect questions, the number of times each possible answer was selected by each type of Responder.
+*<b>Text Tab:</b> Responses to all text-based questions included in the Review.
+*<b>Score Tab:</b> The average of each participating Employee’s average Score for each assessable category and of their Overall Performance Scores.
+====People & Culture - Performance Management Widget – Individual Summary Reports====
+Individual Reports for each Employee’s Performance Review/Cycle are available via the Performance Management Widget > Reviews Tab >Active/Completed Subtab > Action > View Review Report.
+These Reports contain:
+*<b>Results Tab:</b> Scores for each of the Skills, Values, Goals and Behaviours assessed in the Review.
+*<b>Text Tab:</b> Responses to all text-based questions included in the Review.
+*<b>Score Tab:</b> Average Scores for each of the Skills, Values, Goals and Behaviours assessed in the Review, plus the Overall Performance Score.
+===People & Culture - Performance Management Widget – Goals Folder===
+Within the Goals Folder, there are a series of “Tabs” where HR/People & Culture Managers can manage the Goals of Employees. Those Tabs are:
 *Not Started.
-*Cancelled.
+*On Track.
+*Behind.
+*At Risk.
+*Completed.
+*All.
+The definitions for these statuses are:
+On Track: This is the default status.
+<br>
+Behind: Overall progress is less than 60% complete.
+<br>
+At Risk: Overall progress is less than 25% complete with 30 days remaining.
+<br>
+Completed: Overall goal progress is 100%.
-The Goals Folder contains all Employee Goals. New Goals can also be entered without using a Review Cycle. If your [[Creating-Performance-Workflow|Performance Workflow]] Cycle includes a “Goals Define” step, you can create the Goals within the Review Process or directly from this Tab using "Create Goal.” If you have a [[Review-Tool|PDP]] step in your Performance Workflow Cycle, Goals which are created as part of the Review process can be linked to the PDP. They will show up in this Widget as having a relationship. If you are using a PDP step in the Review Cycle, and you enter a Goal through the Widget, you can link this Goal to the PDP and create Training Intervention.
+The Goals Folder contains all Employee Goals. New Goals can also be entered without using a Review Cycle. If your [[Creating-Performance-Workflow|Performance Workflow]] Cycle includes a “Goals Define” step, you can create the Goals within the Review Process or directly from this Tab using "Create Goal.” If you have a [[Review-Tool|PDP]] step in your Performance Workflow Cycle, Goals which are created as part of the Review process can be linked to the PDP. They will show up in this Widget as having a relationship. If you are using a PDP step in the Review Cycle, and you enter a Goal through the Widget, you can link this Goal to the PDP and create Training Intervention. Completed Goals can also be brought into a current Goal Define step to be used again in a Review.
 <table border="1" width="100%" cellspacing="0">
@@ Line 716: / Line 1,779: @@
 <tr>
 <td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>+ Create Goal</b></font></td>
-<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2"> The “Create Goal” Wizard allows HR/P&C Managers to create Goals for all Employees. New Goals can also be created from the [[New-Goals|Employee Goal Wizard]] (coming soon) which is available via the Wizards "START" menu.</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2"> The “Create Goal” Wizard allows HR/P&C Managers to create Goals for all Employees. New Goals can also be created from the [[New-Goals|Employee Goal Wizard]] (coming soon) which is available via the Wizards "START" menu. Business Objectives can be entered against Goals</font></td>
 </tr>
 <tr>
@@ Line 723: / Line 1,786: @@
 </tr>
 <tr>
-<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Active Tab</b></font></td>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Not Started Tab</b></font></td>
-<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Clicking this Tab will display all currently active Performance Goals. The number in brackets displays the total number of active Goals.</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Clicking this Tab will display all currently active Performance Goals that have not yet been started by the Employee they've been assigned to. The number in brackets displays the total number of active Goals.</font></td>
 </tr>
 <tr>
-<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Completed Tab</b></font></td>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>On Track Tab</b></font></td>
-<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Clicking this Tab will display all completed Performance Goals. The number in brackets displays the total number of completed Goals.</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Clicking this Tab will display all Performance Goals that are 'On Track' for completion by the Due Date. The number in brackets displays the total number of On Track Goals.</font></td>
 </tr>
 <tr>
-<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Overdue Tab</b></font></td>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Behind Tab</b></font></td>
-<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Clicking this Tab will display all Performance Goals that are incomplete and/or past their due date. The number in brackets displays the total number of overdue Goals.</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Clicking this Tab will display all Performance Goals that are 'Behind' for completion by the Due Date. The number in brackets displays the total number of Behind Goals.</font></td>
 </tr>
 <tr>
-<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Not Started Tab</b></font></td>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>At Risk Tab</b></font></td>
-<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Clicking this Tab will display all Performance Goals that have not been started by the Employee.</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Clicking this Tab will display all Performance Goals that are 'At Risk' of not being completed by the Due Date. The number in brackets displays the total number of At Risk Goals.</font></td>
 </tr>
 <tr>
-<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Cancelled Tab</b></font></td>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Completed Tab</b></font></td>
-<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Clicking this Tab will display all Performance Goals assigned to Employees that have not yet been started. The number in brackets displays the total number of Employees with Goals that haven’t been started.</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Clicking this Tab will display all Performance Goals that have been 'Completed.' The number in brackets displays the total number of Completed Goals.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>All Tab</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Clicking this Tab will display all Performance Goals, including their Status. The number in brackets displays the total number of Performance Goals currently assigned to Employees. The All Tab also contains a filter that allows Users to filter Goals based on their Status.</font></td>
 </tr>
 <tr>
 <td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Employee</font></td>
 <td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">The name of the Employee that this Goal has been assigned to.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Business Objective</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">The Name of the Business Objective</font></td>
 </tr>
 <tr>
@@ Line 752: / Line 1,823: @@
 <tr>
 <td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">PDP</font></td>
-<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">The related Performance Development Plan in which this Goal was create will be displayed here (if/when relevant).</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">The related Performance Development Plan in which this Goal was create will be displayed here (if/when relevant). This will show the current PDP including current GOALS. You can update the status of the Goals by using the Update Status button. Click the "View Performance Widget", button to be taken to the Performance Widget - Full: Maximized View. Click Export PDF to export a PDF version of the data. The Employee and Manager have the ability to send a Summary on Weekly, Fortnightly or Monthly basis. The summary function will work within the Period of the PDP. To Cancel the Summary, Press Cancel. If you are an Employee you can choose to send a Summary to yourself and or your Manager. If the send summary is not on, it will say "Send Summary - Off". Goals can only be linked to a PDP, through the PDP step or through the Performance Review if a Performance Review / Cycle is Active. PDP can only be used if there is a PDP Step in the Performance Cycle - Review process. E-mail notifications for Reminders will be sent to the Subscribe-HR inbox and e-mail. Recipients can click on the URL to view the PDP in Subscribe-HR. NOTE the e-mails sent are system e-mails not workflow e-mails. Only S-HR developers can use manage these.</font></td>
 </tr>
 <tr>
@@ Line 760: / Line 1,831: @@
 <tr>
 <td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Status</font></td>
-<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">The status of the Goal will display here. This can be Incomplete, Complete or Cancelled.</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">The status of the Goal will display here. This can beNot Start, On Track, Behind, At Risk or Completed..</font></td>
 </tr>
 <tr>
 <td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Due Date</font></td>
 <td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">The Goal's due date will be displayed here.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Target Completion Date</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">The Date the Goal is supposed to be completed.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Enable Reminder</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Select this to be able to send a reminder based on the Target Completion Date. </font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Target Date Completion Reminder (Mandatory)</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">You can select one or multiple of: 1, 2, 7, 14, 30 Days before the reminder date arrives. Pre-defined e-mail templates will send based on these triggers. </font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Target Date Completion Recipients (Mandatory)</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Manager and or Employee can select to send to Manager and or Employee. </font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Description</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Notes field for the Description of the Goal.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Notes</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This is a field for making notes.</font></td>
 </tr>
 <tr>
 <td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Action</font></td>
-<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This dropdown will allow HR/P&C Manager to edit Employee Goals.</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This dropdown will allow Managers to view and edit Employee Goals. Update Status Action can be used to update the Goal Status. The options are:
+*<b>View </b> - allows the user to View the Goal. <br>
+*<b>Edit </b> - allows the user to Edit the Goal.<br>
+*<b>Update Status</b> - allows the user to update the Status the Goal.</font></td>
 </tr>
 </table>
-===Performance Management Widget – Catch Ups Folder===
+===People & Culture - Performance Management Widget – Catch Ups Folder===
 Within the Catch Ups Folder, there are a series of “Tabs” where HR/P&C Managers can manage Catch Ups for Employees. Those Tabs are:
@@ Line 820: / Line 1,918: @@
 </tr>
 <tr>
-<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Action</font></td>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Comments/Notes/Questions</font></td>
-<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Reply</b> - Use this option to Start the conversation for the Catch Up.<br><b>Complete Catch Up</b> - Use this option to reply to the conversation.<br><b>Create Next Catch-up</b> - Use this option to create a follow-up Catch Up.</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Free type text here.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Attachments</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Link attachments here.<br>
+NOTE: Both participants in the Catch-Up can upload additional attachments (after the initial creation of the Catch-Up) as part of the ongoing Catch-Up 'Conversation'). </font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Actions</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This dropdown allows user to perform either of the following:<br>
+*<b>Reply</b> - Use this option to Start the conversation for the Catch Up.<br>
+*<b>Complete Catch Up</b> - Use this option to reply to the conversation.<br>
+*<b>Create Next Catch-up</b> - Use this option to create a follow-up Catch Up.</font></td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+===People & Culture - Performance Management Widget – Acknowledgements Folder===
+The Acknowledgements Folder contains all Acknowledgements that have been sent to Employees, Locations, or Departments. People & Culture Users can see Acknowledgements for the entire organisation. Users can also create new Acknowledgements from this Tab on the Performance Management Widget, via '+Create Acknowledgement' on the 'Acknowledgements' Tab in the [[People-and-Culture-Widgets#People_.26_Culture_Widget_-_Announcements_and_Acknowledgements_Widget|Announcements & Acknowledgements Widget]], or by triggering the Acknowledgement Wizard via the ‘START’ menu.
+<table border="1" width="100%" cellspacing="0">
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Field Name</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Description</b></font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>+ Create Acknowledgement</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Top Right of the Widget. Starts the New Acknowledgement Wizard, for you to be able to create a new acknowledgement. This is also available from the "START" options</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Search Keyword </font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This is a free text field that you can use to search Announcements based on keywords you enter in the search field.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>All Received Sub-Folder</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Contains acknowledgements sent to/received by the Employee.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>All Sent Sub-Folder</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Contains acknowledgements sent by Employees.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Create Date</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This is the date and time the Acknowledgement was created.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Title</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">The Title of the Acknowledgement is displayed here.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Likes</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Clicking the "thumbs up" icon will Like the Acknowledgement. The number beside it displays the total number of likes the Acknowledgement has received.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Comments</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Clicking the speech bubble icon will allow you to enter in comments related to the Acknowledgement. The number beside it will display the total number of comments made against the Acknowledgement.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Sent To</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Employees, locations and/or departments that have been acknowledged will be displayed here.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Sent By</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">The name of the individual who sent this Acknowledgement will be displayed here.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Actions</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Use this dropdown to action the following:
+*<b>Edit</b> - edit an Acknowledgement.
+*<b>Delete</b> - delete an Acknowledgement.
+*<b>View</b> - view an Acknowledgement.</font></td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+===People & Culture - Performance Management Widget – Skills Folder===
+The Skills Folder contains the current Skills that all Employees have been assessed for during a Performance Review Cycle, or which have been assigned/assessed on an Ad Hoc basis. A 'current' skill is defined as the 'most recent' record of a Skill that has been created/assigned to an Employee. The Employee may have 'previous' records of assignment/assessment for a particular Skill (for example if they were assessed for that Skill in a previous/older Performance Review Cycle). Older versions of Skills are not displayed in the Tab and can be found via the Employee's Skills record in Performance Management.
+People & Culture Users are the only Users who can create 'Ad Hoc' Skills (outside of a Performance Review Cycle) for Employees. However, if there is a 'Performance Review Cycle' (Cycles or Start Date-based) activated in the System, the '+Create New' option on the Skills Tab will be deactivated. Users can only create Skills using one method or the other (not both at the same time).
+<table border="1" width="100%" cellspacing="0">
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Field Name</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Description</b></font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>+ Create Skill</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Top Right of the Widget. Starts the Skill Wizard, and allows the User to select a Skill from the 'Skills Library' and assign it to an Employee.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Search Keyword</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This is a free text field that you can use to search the Skill s Tab for an Employee name, or for a Skill Type.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Current Sub-Tab</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Displays the Skills that the Employee was assigned/assessed for during the current/most recent Performance Review Cycle.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Gaps Sub-Tab</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Displays the Employees that have Gaps in their Skills (in relation to the Skills required for the Job they hold).</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Employee Name</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">The name of the Employee that the Skill (or Skills Gap) relates to.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Skill Name</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">The name of the Skill assigned to/for which the Employee was assessed.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Skill Gap</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">The name of the Skill the Employee has a Gap for (in relation to the Job they hold).</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Required for the Job</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">The name of the Job the Skill is required for.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Date Created</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Displays the Date that the Skill was assigned to the Employee for assessment. Or, if the Skill was created Ad Hoc by a People & culture User (not via a Performance Review Cycle), the date the Skill was created/assigned to the Employee.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Linked Cycle</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">If the Skill was assigned to an Employee and assessed by the Employee/Manager as part of a Performance Review Cycle - a link to the most recent/current Performance Review Cycle will appear here. There will be a record for the Skill assessed by the Employee, and another for that Skill assessed by their Manager.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Score</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Displays the Score that the Assessor gave to the Employee for that Skill Type.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Date Created</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Displays the date that the Skill record wa created.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Assessed By</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">The name of the Individual who created/assessed the Employee for that Skill Type.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Date Assessed</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Displays the Date that the Skill was assigned to the Employee and assessed (as part of a Performance Review Cycle).</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Current</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Specifies if the Skill is current (Yes) or not (No).</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Actions</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Use this dropdown to action the following:
+*<b>Edit</b> - edit a Skill.
+*<b>Delete</b> - delete a Skill.
+*<b>View</b> - view a Skill.
+*<b>Add Employee to Course Waiting List</b> - allows the User to add the Employee to the Course Waiting list so that they are then enrolled when an internal Training Event for that Course type is next scheduled.
+*<b>Add Employee to Event Waiting List</b> - allows the User to add the Employee to an Event Waiting when a Course is scheduled.
+*<b>Create Training Record</b> - allows the User to a Training Record for that Employee.</font></td>
 </tr>
 </table>
@@ Line 829: / Line 2,082: @@
 This widget display information regarding all timesheets related to the logged-in HR/People & Culture Manager.
+Submitting requests for Timesheets works as follows:
+*System Administrators and People & Culture Users can create/submit/apply for Timesheets for all Users.
+**To do so, the User must be on the People & Culture Dashboard (and can then use the Timesheet Wizard vis the 'Start' Wizard menu, or via the Timesheet Wizard that is accessible via the Timesheet Widget on the People & Culture Dashboard).
+*Managers can submit Timesheets on behalf of their direct reports only (such Managers need to have 'Line Manager' User Group assigned, they have to be set in the System as a 'Manager,' and specified as the Employee's Manager to be able to do this). Other Line Managers can't submit Timesheets on behalf of Employees for whom they are not the specified/assigned Manager. Only one Manager can/has the capacity to do this.
+**To do so, the User must be on the Manager Dashboard (and can then use the Timesheet Wizard vis the 'Start' Wizard menu, or via the Timesheet Wizard that is accessible via the Timesheet Widget on the Manager Dashboard).
 <table border="1" width="100%" cellspacing="0">
@@ Line 837: / Line 2,096: @@
 <tr>
 <td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>In Progress Tab</b></font></td>
-<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Displays all saved but not submitted timesheets. Number in brackets outline the total number of "In Progress" timesheets.</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Displays all saved but not submitted timesheets. The number in brackets indicates the total number of "In Progress" Timesheets (currently being worked on, but not yet submitted for authorisation).</font></td>
 </tr>
 <tr>
 <td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Requested Tab</b></font></td>
-<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Displays all timesheets that have been submitted but are have yet to be authorised/rejected. Number in brackets outline the total number of pending timesheets.</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Displays all Timesheets that have been submitted but are have yet to be authorised/rejected. The number in brackets indicates the total number of Timesheets requiring authorisation.</font></td>
 </tr>
 <tr>
 <td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Authorised Tab</b></font></td>
-<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Displays all timesheets that have been authorised by the authoriser. Number in brackets outline the total number of Authorised timesheets.</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Displays all Timesheets that have been authorised by the authoriser. The number in brackets indicates the total number of Authorised timesheets.</font></td>
 </tr>
 <tr>
 <td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Rejected Tab</b></font></td>
-<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Displays all timesheets that have been rejected by the authoriser. Number in brackets outline the total number of Rejected timesheets.</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Displays all Timesheets that have been rejected by the authoriser. Rejected Timesheets can not be edited and resubmitted, however, if/when a new Timesheet is started (after one has been rejected), the new Timesheet will pick up/include the entries from the most recently saved/submitted Timesheet (the rejected one). If a new Timsheet is submitted after the rejection of a previously submitted Timesheet - that Timesheet record will disappear from the 'Rejected' subtab (however, there will be a record of it in the 'Workflow History' (via the System Inbox or the Tasks & Notifications Widget). The newly created/submitted Timesheet will then appear on the 'Requested' subtab. The number in brackets indicates the total number of Rejected Timesheets.</font></td>
 </tr>
 <tr>
-<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Cancelled Tab</b></font></td>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Resubmit Tab</b></font></td>
-<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Displays all timesheets that have been cancelled. Number in brackets outline the total number of cancelled timesheets.</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Displays all Timesheets that have been cancelled. Cancelled Timesheets can be edited and resubmitted. The number in brackets indicates the total number of cancelled Timesheets.</font></td>
 </tr>
 <tr>
 <td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>+ Create Timesheet</b></font></td>
-<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Clicking this button will allow users to quickly create a timesheet through the New Timesheet Wizard.</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Clicking this button will allow users to quickly create a timesheet through the New Timesheet Wizard. P&C user can "Create" and "Submit" a Timesheet for any Employee.</font></td>
 </tr>
 <tr>
@@ Line 869: / Line 2,128: @@
 <tr>
 <td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Period</font></td>
-<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Duration of timesheet will display here in DD/MM/YYY - DD/MM/YYYY format.</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Duration of Timesheet/Pay period will display here in DD/MM/YYY - DD/MM/YYYY format. Depending on the 'Timesheet Settings' in the [[Dashboard-Activation-Hub#Core-HR|Core-HR Widget]] on the Activation Hub, this will either be:
+*Weekly.
+*Fortnightly.</font></td>
 </tr>
 <tr>
@@ Line 878: / Line 2,139: @@
 <td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Total Hours</font></td>
 <td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Total number of hours recorded within the timesheet will appear under here.</font></td>
-</tr>
-<tr>
-<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Time Off</font></td>
-<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Total number of hours employee was away will appear here.</font></td>
 </tr>
 <tr>
 <td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Authoriser</font></td>
-<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">The name of the timesheet's authoriser will appear here.</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">The name of the timesheet's authoriser will appear here as a hyperlink. Clicking the link will open a popup window that displays the Timesheet history, including:
+*The Employee who submitted the Timesheet (including a date and time stamp).
+*The Manager to whom the Timesheet is originally sent for Authorisation.
+*A list of People & Culture Users who also have permission to Authorise the Timesheet.
+*If the Timesheet has been forwarded to a second (third, or more) Authoriser, that list will appear here (including a date and time stamp). If the Timesheet is forwarded, then the name of the Authoriser in this column will update to reflect the Authoriser that the Timesheet is currently with until the final Authoriser completes the process. Once completed, the name will revert to the original Manager that the Timesheet was sent to.
+<b>NOTES:</b>
+*Upon submission, the Timesheet Authorisation request is sent to:
+**The Employee's Manager.
+**People & Culture Users.
+The Authorisation request will appear in both the Inbox and Tasks & Notifications Widget of the Authorisers. It will also appear on the 'Requested' subtab of the Timesheets Widget on either their Manager or People & Culture Dashboard.
+*Unless/until the Timesheet is 'Forwarded' - it can be authorised by either the Manager or any of the People & Culture Users if (for example) the Manager to whom it was submitted is absent.
+*If the Timesheet is Authorised (without being forwarded) it will then move to the 'Authorised' subtab of the Timesheets Widget.
+*If the Timesheet is Rejected (without being forwarded) - a copy of that original Timesheet will appear on the 'Rejected' subtab of the Timesheets Widget. When a new Timesheet is created for that Employee, the hours submitted in the rejected timesheet will be picked up in the new Timesheet and the Employee will need to update these fields as necessary.
+*The Employee, the Employee's Manager and all People & Culture Users will be able to see the Timesheet's progress under the relevant subtabs in the Timesheets Widget on their relevant Dashboard.
+*If the Timesheet is forwarded (for Authorisation by multiple Users/Authorisers):
+**From the point of the first forward, the Timesheet is locked and only the Employee (Manager or People & Culture user) to whom it was sent (forwarded) can then either Authorise/Reject/Forward the Timesheet. Other People & Culture Users can no longer Authorise the Timesheet from this point forward.
+**If an Authoriser is absent for any reason - the Timesheet should not be forwarded to that Employee (no one else will be able to Authorise the Timesheet in their absence unless that Employee set up a 'Delegation' prior to the submission of the Timesheet for Authorisation).
+***The delegation (created by an absent Employee) will only work if the Employee delegated to is a Manager or People & Culture User (only Employees with these User Groups assigned can Authorise Timesheets). Employees with Self-Service User Group access only will not be able to Authorise a Timesheet if a delegation has been set up to go to them. See 'Actions - Authorise' below for more information about how 'Forwarding' works or refer to the [[New-Timesheet-Wizard|Timesheet Wizard]].
+</font></td>
 </tr>
 <tr>
-<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Action</font></td>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Actions</font></td>
-<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This dropdown allows user to perform either of the following:<br><b>Cancel</b> - Cancel the timesheet<br><b>View</b> - View the timesheet<br><b>Authorise</b> - Authorise the timesheet<br><b>Reject</b> - Reject the timesheet<br><b>Export to CSV</b> - Export the timesheet into a CSV file</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This dropdown allows user to perform either of the following:<br>
+*<b>View</b> - View the timesheet.<br>
+*<b>Edit</b> - Edit the timesheet (Timesheets can only be edited prior to submission, or post cancellation. If a Timesheet has been submitted for authorisation (and not cancelled/rejected) it is locked and can't be edited).<br>
+*<b>Edit & Resubmit</b> - Edit the timesheet and resubmit it (Timesheets can only be edited and resubmitted via the 'Resubmit' subtab (post-cancellation). If a Timesheet has been submitted for Authorisation (and not cancelled/rejected) it is locked and can't be edited.<br>
+*<b>Cancel</b> - Cancel the Timesheet (cancelled Timesheets will appear under the 'Resubmit' subtab and can be edited and resubmitted).<br>
+*<b>Authorise/Reject/Forward</b> - Authorise, Reject or Forward the Timesheet.<br>
+**<b>NOTES:</b>
+***Users can include multiple Employees in the Authorisation process. The original recipient of the Authorisation request has the option to 'Authorise,' 'Reject' or 'Forward' the Authorisation. If Authorised, the request is completed. If Rejected, the request is completed. If forwarded, it is assumed that the forwarding Employee has given their Authorisation for that request and is forwarding the request on to the next Authoriser. This process can be done multiple times. When Forwarded, the request isn't completed/fully Authorised until the an Employee (the most senior or final in the process) selects 'Authorise.' This completes the Authorisation process. A history of all Employees with a date and time stamps is added to the Authorisation request each time it is forwarded, so that all previous Authorisations can be seen by the subsequent Employee. A record of all Actions taken are also recorded in the WIP (on the Tasks & Notifications Widget or in the System Inbox).
+***Timesheets that have been started but not submitted, or submitted for approval, but not yet ‘Authorised’ can be 'Cancelled' via the 'In Progress' or 'Submitted' Tabs in the Timesheets Widget.
+***Once the Timesheet has been ‘Authorised,‘ must be 'Cancelled' via the Authorised Tab in the Timesheets Widget.
+****<b>The 'Cancellation' of an 'Authorised' Timesheet can only be done by a People & Culture User/System Administrator via the Timesheets Widget on the People & Culture Dashboard (this action can't be taken on the Manager or My Info Dashboards).</b> For more information about Timesheets Cancellation, see the  [[New-Timesheet-Wizard|Timesheets Wizard]] Wiki page.
+*****Only a Timesheet cancelled prior to 'Authorisation' can be 'edited and resubmitted.' For Timesheets cancelled prior to Authorisation, the data from the previously submitted Timeshseet will appear.
+*****Timesheets cancelled post Authorisation will need to be started again (no data from the previously submitted/authorised/cancelled Timesheet will appear).<br>
+***Not all Payroll solution APIs enable/facilitate the export and update of the Timesheets Authorisation in Payroll once an 'Authorised' record has been created/exported. For Payroll solutions that do enable the export of the 'Cancellation' of a Timesheet - this will update/cancel the Timesheet in Payroll. Please check with Support or your Project Manager to find out if your Payroll solution enables the export of 'Cancelled' Timesheets post Authorisation. If not, then the Timesheet will need to be updated in both Subscribe-HR and Payroll manually.
+***The configuration of each Payroll API/integration (and therefore how Timesheets configuration and export settings behave in each Payroll integration) is different. Some Authorised Timesheets will transfer straight away. Some Payroll solutions/APIs make it possible to time it so that Timesheets are only transferred from Subscribe-HR to Payroll right before the pay run. Please check with Support or your Project Manager to confirm the behaviour for your organisation’s Payroll solution.
+*<b>Export to CSV</b> - Export the timesheet into a CSV file.</font></td>
 </tr>
 </table>
 ==People & Culture - Time Off Management Widget==
 This Widget displays information regarding absence requests related to the logged-in HR/People & Culture Manager and their team.
+Submitting requests for Time Off/Leave works as follows:
+*System Administrators and People & Culture Users can create/submit/apply for Time Off/Leave for all Users.
+**To do so, the User must be on the People & Culture Dashboard (and can then use the Time Off Wizard vis the 'Start' Wizard menu, or via the Time Off Wizard that is accessible via the Time Off Widget on the People & Culture Dashboard).
+*Managers can apply for Time Off/Leave on behalf of their direct reports only (such Managers need to have 'Line Manager' User Group assigned, they have to be set in the System as a 'Manager,' and specified as the Employee's Manager to be able to do this). Other Line Managers can't apply for Time Off/Leave on behalf of Employees for whom they are not the specified/assigned Manager. Only one Manager can/has the capacity to do this.
+**To do so, the User must be on the Manager Dashboard (and can then use the Time Off Wizard vis the 'Start' Wizard menu, or via the Time Off Wizard that is accessible via the Time Off Widget on the Manager Dashboard).
 <table border="1" width="100%" cellspacing="0">
@@ Line 943: / Line 2,239: @@
 <td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">The date the absence ends will display here in DD/MM/YYYY format.</font></td>
 </tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Absence Type</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">E.g. Sick - Personal Carers, LSL, Annual. If Personal (Sick Leave): You can attach a Doctors Certificate or Self Certify. If Personal (Carer's Leave): You can record Illness and also link a Dependent.</font></td>
 <tr>
 <td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Days/Hours</font></td>
@@ Line 952: / Line 2,250: @@
 </tr>
 <tr>
-<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Action</font></td>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Actions</font></td>
-<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This dropdown allows user to perform either of the following:<br><b>View</b> - view the request<br><b>Cancel</b> - Cancel the request<br><b>Reject</b> - Decline the request<br><b>Authorise</b> - Accept the request<br><b>View accruals</b> - view the accrual levels of the related employee<br><b>View Team Leaver Planner</b> - access the team leaver planner functionality</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This dropdown allows user to perform either of the following:
+*<b>View</b> - view the request.<br>
+*<b>Cancel</b> - cancels a Time Off request (requests can only be cancelled via the Time Off Widget prior to 'Authorisation').<br>
+*<b>Authorise/Reject/Forward</b> - Authorise, Reject or Forward the timesheet.<br>
+**<b>NOTES:</b>
+***Users can include multiple Employees in the Authorisation process. The original recipient of the Authorisation request has the option to 'Authorise' or 'Forward' the Authorisation. If Authorised, the request is completed. If forwarded, it is assumed that the forwarding Employee has given their Authorisation for that request and is forwarding the request on tot he next Authoriser. This process can be done multiple times. When forwarded, the request isn't completed/full Authorised until the an Employee (the most senior or final in the process) selects 'Authorise.' This completes the Authorisation process. A history of all Employees with a date and time stamps is added to the Authorisation request each time it is forwarded, so that all previous Authorisations can be seen by the subsequent Employee.
+***Once Time Off requests have been 'Authorised' they can't be 'Rejected' (either via the Widget for via the LHS menu on the Employee's Time Off/Absence record). The only way to 'Cancel' an 'Authorised' Time Off request post Authorisation is via the LHS menu (by changing the status of the individual request in question to 'Cancelled' on the Time Off record via Employees > Absence). <b>Please note that Only System Administrators can cancel 'Cancel' Authorised Time Off requests in this way.</b>
+***It is fair to assume that as soon as the Time Off request is 'Authorised' it will be exported to Payroll (assuming there is a Payroll integration in place).
+***Not all Payroll solution APIs enable/facilitate the export and update (Cancellation) of the Time Off Authorisation in Payroll once an 'Authorised' record has been created/exported. For Payroll solutions that do enable the export of the 'Cancellation' of a Time Off request - this will update/cancel the Time Off request in Payroll. Please check with Support or your Project Manager to find out if your Payroll solution enables the export of 'Cancelled' Time Off requests. If not, then the Time Off request will need to be cancelled in both Subscribe-HR and Payroll manually.
+*<b>View Accruals</b> - view the accrual levels of the related employee.<br>
+*<b>View Team Leaver Planner</b> - access the team leaver planner functionality.</font></td>
 </tr>
 </table>
 ==People & Culture – HR Surveys Widget==
@@ Line 1,005: / Line 2,312: @@
 <tr>
 <td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Type (Under Active Tab)</font></td>
-<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This specifies whether the Survey is an HR or Recruitment Survey.</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This specifies whether the Survey is an Onboarding, HR or Recruitment Survey.</font></td>
 </tr>
 <tr>
@@ Line 1,020: / Line 2,327: @@
 </tr>
 <tr>
-<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Action (Under Active Tab)</font></td>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Actions (Under Active Tab)</font></td>
-<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This dropdown allows user to perform any/all of the following:<br><b>Open Canvas</b> - view the Canvas/Survey<br><b>Results</b> - View the results of the Canvas/Survey<br><b>Resend Link</b> - Resend the Employee a link to that Canvas/Survey</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This dropdown allows user to perform any/all of the following:<br>
+*<b>Open Canvas</b> - view the Canvas/Survey.<br>
+*<b>Results</b> - View the results of the Canvas/Survey.<br>
+*<b>Resend Link</b> - Resend the Employee a link to that Canvas/Survey.</font></td>
 </tr>
 <tr>
@@ Line 1,041: / Line 2,351: @@
 <tr>
 <td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Type (Under Completed Tab)</font></td>
-<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This specifies whether the Survey is an HR or Recruitment Survey.</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This specifies whether the Survey is an Onboarding, HR or Recruitment Survey.</font></td>
 </tr>
 <tr>
@@ Line 1,056: / Line 2,366: @@
 </tr>
 <tr>
-<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Action (Under Completed Tab)</font></td>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Actions (Under Completed Tab)</font></td>
-<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This dropdown allows user to perform any/all of the following:<br><b>Open Canvas</b> - view the Canvas/Survey<br><b>Results</b> - View the results of the Canvas/Survey<br></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This dropdown allows user to perform any/all of the following:
+*<b>Open Canvas</b> - view the Canvas/Survey.<br>
+*<b>Results</b> - View the results of the Canvas/Survey.<br></font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Actions (Under All Tab)</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This dropdown allows user to perform any/all of the following:
+*<b>Report</b> - View Summary Report of the Survey. View Summary information based on Jobs, Locations, Departments and Managers.<br>
+*<b>Cancel</b> - Cancels the Whole HR Survey. Survey can't be restarted after it's canceled. If you think you may want to restart a Survey, use the Pause option.<br>
+*<b>Pause</b> - This pauses the Survey. The Survey can be "Restarted".<br>
+*<b>Restart</b> - Use this option to Restart the Survey if you have paused it.<br></font></td>
 </tr>
 </table>
 ==People & Culture – Compliance Management Widget==
-The Compliance Management Widget allows People and Culture users to view, track and manage Employee compliance.
+The Compliance Management Widget allows People and Culture users to view, track and manage Employee compliance in relation to Certificates & Licences, Background Checks and Education & Qualifications. P&C Users can validate (or reject) the records supplied by Applicants during the application process (and transferred to the Employee Record when a New Employee was created from Applicant), as well as creating new records.
 This widget allows for Users to quickly and easily manage Employees through the each of the following processes by clicking on the relevant “Folder”:
@@ Line 1,077: / Line 2,396: @@
 *Expired.
 *Active.
+*Pending.
 *From Applicant.
+*Failed.
 On each of these Tabs, there is a table that contains different columns. The Tabs and Columns are explained below.
+The preferred document/file types that can be uploaded in the System for Compliance documentation are:
+*Word (docx).
+*Pdf.
+*Rich Text (rtf).
+*Png.
 === Compliance Management Widget – Certificates & Licences Folder ===
-This Folder displays all the Certificates & Licences held by Employees and their current status. It also allows Users to create new and/or validate Certificates & Licences for Employees.
+This Folder displays all the Certificates & Licences held by Employees and their current status. It also allows Users to create new and/or validate Certificates & Licences for Employees. If you are using Recruitment, Certificates and Licences can be moved through from the Applicant to Employee. You would use the From Applicant Tab, which is outlined below, to Validate the From Applicant Records. On Validating you can enter an Expiry Date. Certificate and Licences, need to be Mapped to CVCheck items in the CVCheck APP to allow for any current Certificate and Licence Data, in Subscribe-HR to be selected to then run a CVCheck. Without this Mapping the CVCheck option will not appear in the "Action".
 <table border="1" width="100%" cellspacing="0">
@@ Line 1,093: / Line 2,420: @@
 <tr>
 <td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Search</b></font></td>
-<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>This is a free text field that allows Users to filter the list based on specific keywords entered here.</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This is a free text field that allows Users to filter the list based on specific keywords entered here.</font></td>
 </tr>
 <tr>
-<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>+ Create New</b></font></td>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Filter</b></font></td>
-<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Allows the User to create a new Certificate & Licence record for an Employee using the [[New-Compliance Management|Compliance Management Wizard]].</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Allows the User to "Filter" Certificates/Licences records by Tag or Filter: E.g. Licence name/type, Certificate name/type.</font></td>
 </tr>
 <tr>
-<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Filter</b></font></td>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Date/Timeframe Search</b></font></td>
-<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Allows the User to "Filter" Certificates/Licences records by Tag or Filter: E.g. Licence name, Certificate name.</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Allows the User to "Filter" Certificates/Licences records  based on the timeframes in the dropdown menu, which include: one day, one week, two weeks, one month. When active/a date range search parameter/filter is being applied, the looking glass square will be green.</font></td>
 </tr>
 <tr>
 <td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Expiring Filter</b></font></td>
-<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Contains a dropdown list of timeframe filters. The default is set to three months, but Users can also change the view to display what's expiring in different timeframes (up to a year).</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Contains a dropdown list of timeframe filters. The default is set to three months, but Users can also change the view to display what's expiring in different timeframes (up to a year).</font></td>
 </tr>
 <tr>
 <td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Expiring Tab</b></font></td>
-<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Displays all the Certificates & Licences that are expiring within the next three months.</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Displays all the Certificates & Licences that are expiring within the next three months.<</font></td>
 </tr>
 <tr>
 <td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Expired Tab</b></font></td>
-<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Displays all the Certificates & Licences that have expired and need renewing.</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Displays all the Certificates & Licences that have expired and need renewing.</font></td>
 </tr>
 <tr>
 <td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Active Tab</b></font></td>
-<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Displays all the Certificates & Licences that are current (and don’t fall under the other two tabs/categories above).</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Displays all the Certificates & Licences that are current (and don’t fall under the other two tabs/categories above).</font></td>
 </tr>
 <tr>
-<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>From Applicant Tab</b></font></td>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Pending</b></font></td>
-<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Displays all the Certificates & Licences that need to be validated by HR to ensure that all Certificates/Licences nominated by the Applicant during the recruitment process are in fact valid.</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This Displays any Certificates and Licences, which have been entered by an Employee, or Manager which need to be Verified before they become Active. Verification is an "Action". If the User "Rejects" the Check, it moves to the "Failed" Tab. If the CVCheck APP is installed, when the CVCheck is sent to CVCheck for New Checks or Renewal Checks, the check will be in Pending, until the results come back and the P&C user either "Activates" or "Rejects". If they Activate, they will be asked to enter an Expiry Date, so that the Check can be placed into Expiring and Expired based on the Expiry Date. The Results are available from the CVCheck list by clicking on the Document Image. Any Check that is not validated will end up in pending.</font></td>
 </tr>
 <tr>
-<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">ID</font></td>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>From Applicant Tab</b></font></td>
-<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This is the ID of the Certificate/Licence.</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Displays all the Certificates & Licences that need to be validated by HR to ensure that all Certificates/Licences nominated by the Applicant during the recruitment process are in fact valid. If a CVCheck is done against the Applicant Record, the CVCheck results for that check will flow into From Applicant.</font></td>
 </tr>
 <tr>
-<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Certificate/Licence Name</font></td>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Failed</b></font></td>
-<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2"> The name of the Certificate/Licence is displayed here. Users can click on the name and this will open/display the Certificate/Licence in a pop-up/lightbox.</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Any Check that has been "Rejected" will end up in the "Failed" Tab. The is a "Validate" Action against the "Failed" items in the Failed Tab.</font></td>
 </tr>
 <tr>
-<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Applicant</font></td>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">ID</font></td>
-<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">The name of the Applicant (from which the Employee record was created) that this Certificate/Licence relates/belongs to is displayed here.</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This is the ID of the Certificate/Licence.</font></td>
 </tr>
 <tr>
@@ Line 1,148: / Line 2,475: @@
 </tr>
 <tr>
-<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Expires On</font></td>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Checked Date</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">The date on which the Certificate/Licence was validated is displayed here.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Certificate/Licence Name</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2"> The name of the Certificate/Licence is displayed here. Users can click on the name and this will open/display the Certificate/Licence in a pop-up/lightbox.</font></td></tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Expiry Date</font></td>
 <td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">The date on which the Certificate/Licence expires is displayed here.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Previous</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">If the current Certificate/Licence has been renewed based on a previously existing Certificate/Licence, the ID of the previous Certificate/Licence record is is displayed here.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Current</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">If the Certificate/Licence has expired and a new Certificate/Licence record created based on renewing that Certificate/Licence, the ID of the new record is is displayed here.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">From Applicant</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">The name of the Applicant (from which the Employee record was created) that this Certificate/Licence relates/belongs to is displayed here (on the 'From Applicant' Tab only).</font></td>
 </tr>
 <tr>
@@ Line 1,156: / Line 2,502: @@
 </tr>
 <tr>
-<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Action</font></td>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Actions</font></td>
 <td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">
-<b>Create New</b> - allows the User to create a new Certificate/Licence. It is mandatory as part of this step for Users to attach a copy of the Certificate/Licence to validate/keep a record of it.
+*<b>Create New</b> - allows the User to create a new Certificate/Licence. It is mandatory as part of this step for Users to attach a copy of the Certificate/Licence to validate/keep a record of it.
-<br>
+*<b>Edit</b> - allows the User to edit the Certificate/Licence. Certificates/Licences can't be edited once they are 'Active.'
-<b>Edit</b> - allows the User to edit the new Certificate/Licence.
+*<b>View</b> - allows the User to view a copy of the Certificate/Licence.
-<br>
+*<b>Add to Course Waiting List</b> - allows the User to add that Employee to a Course Waiting list to renew or do any extra training required to maintain that Certificate/Licence.
-<b>View</b> - allows the User to view a copy of the Certificate/Licence.
+*<b>Add to Event Waiting List</b> - allows the User to add that Employee to an Event waiting list to renew or do any extra training required to maintain that Certificate/Licence.
-<br>
+*<b>Training Record – No Event</b> - allows the User to create a ‘One-Off’ Training Record for training activity completed by the Employee.
-<b>Add to Course Waiting List</b> - allows the User to add that Employee to a Course Waiting list for that Certificate/Licence.
+*<b>Renew</b> - allows the User to renew the Certificate/Licence.
-<br>
+*<b>Validate</b> - allows the User to validate the Certificate/Licence of an Applicant/Employee (on the 'From Applicant' Tab only).
-<b>Add to Event Waiting List</b> - allows the User to add that Employee to an Event waiting list for that Certificate/Licence.
+*<b>Reject</b> - allows the User to reject an invalid Certificate/Licence that has been transferred from an Applicant record (on the 'From Applicant' Tab only).
-<br>
+*<b>Renew CVCheck</b> - This allow for you to Renew the Membership that belongs to the Education and Qualifications Record. This "Action" is available in the Expiry and Expired Tabs. You do this through the Renewal "Action" against the Education and Qualifications Record. It will create a New Education and Qualification Record with the same data as the previous, but it will allow you to update the Membership Expiry. So you are not checking the Education and Qualifications, you are rechecking/renewing the Membership. When you renew the Check, through CVCheck for Membership it will go to Pending, and the P&C user needs to "Validate" or "Reject" it once the results come back.
-<b>Renew</b> - allows the User to renew the Certificate/Licence.
-<br>
-<b>Validate</b> - allows the User to validate the Certificate/Licence of an Applicant/Employee.
-<br>
-<b>Reject</b> - allows the User to reject an invalid Certificate/Licence that has been transferred from an Applicant record.
 </font></td>
 </tr>
 </table>
 === Compliance Management Widget – Background Checks Folder ===
-This Folder displays all the Background Checks held by Employees and their current status. It also allows Users to create new and/or validate Background Checks for Employees.
+This Folder displays all the Background Checks held by Employees and their current status. It also allows Users to create new and/or validate Background Checks for Employees. If using the CVCheck APP, CVCheck Background checks need to be Mapped into the relevant Subscribe-HR folders and fields. So that Applicant and Employees can be used for running Background Checks. This is needed for Employee checks otherwise the "Action" for CVCheck will not Display.
 The types of Background checks include:
-*Visas.
+*Visa - VEVO.
 *Police checks.
 *Working with Children checks.
@@ Line 1,194: / Line 2,534: @@
 <tr>
 <td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Search</b></font></td>
-<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>This is a free text field that allows Users to filter the list based on specific keywords entered here.</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This is a free text field that allows Users to filter the list based on specific keywords entered here.</font></td>
 </tr>
 <tr>
 <td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>+ Create New</b></font></td>
-<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Allows the User to create a new Background Check record for an Employee using the [[New-Compliance Management|Compliance Management Wizard]].</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Allows the User to create a new Background Check record for an Employee using the [[New-Compliance Management|Compliance Management Wizard]]. It is mandatory as part of this step for Users to attach a copy of the Background Check to validate/keep a record of it.</font></td>
 </tr>
 <tr>
 <td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Filter</b></font></td>
-<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Allows the User to "Filter" Background Check records by Tag or Filter: E.g. Visa, Police check etc.</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Allows the User to "Filter" Background Check records by Tag or Filter: E.g. Visa, Police check etc.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Date/Timeframe Search</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Allows the User to "Filter" Background Check records based on the timeframes in the dropdown menu, which include: one day, one week, two weeks, one month. When active/a date range search parameter/filter is being applied, the looking glass square will be green.</font></td>
 </tr>
 <tr>
 <td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Expiring Tab</b></font></td>
-<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Displays all the Background Checks that are expiring within the next three months.</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Displays all the Background Checks that are expiring within the next three months.</font></td>
 </tr>
 <tr>
 <td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Expired Tab</b></font></td>
-<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Displays all the Background Checks that have expired and need renewing.</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Displays all the Background Checks that have expired and need renewing.</font></td>
 </tr>
 <tr>
 <td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Active Tab</b></font></td>
-<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Displays all the Background Checks that are current (and don’t fall under the other two tabs/categories above).</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Displays all the Background Checks that are current (and don’t fall under the other two tabs/categories above).</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Pending Tab</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Displays all the Background Checks that need to be conducted/completed. Any New Background Checks that are Created, will flow into Pending. So that they can then be Activated, or Rejected. If a P&C User Enters a Background Check, they still need to Validate it from Pending. Any CVChecks that are done, will go to Pending, and when the results are back, the user can either Validate to send it to Active or Reject it to Fail the Check. Prior to Activation, the Use needs to enter an Expiry Date.</font></td>
 </tr>
 <tr>
 <td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>From Applicant Tab</b></font></td>
-<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Displays all the Background Checks that need to be validated by HR to ensure that all Background Checks nominated by the Applicant during the recruitment process are in fact valid.</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Displays all the Background Checks that need to be validated by HR to ensure that all Background Checks nominated by the Applicant during the recruitment process are in fact valid.</font></td>
 </tr>
 <tr>
-<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">ID</font></td>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Failed Tab</b></font></td>
-<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This is the ID of the Background Check.</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Displays all the Background Checks that have resulted in a negative/failed result. Use can Validate from this Tab via the Validate "Action".</font></td>
 </tr>
 <tr>
-<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Background Check Name</font></td>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>All Tab</b></font></td>
-<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2"> The name of the Background Check is displayed here. Users can click on the name and this will open/display the Background Check in a pop-up/lightbox.</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Displays all the Background Checks (from each of the above categories) on one tab.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">ID</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This is the ID of the Background Check.</font></td>
 </tr>
 <tr>
@@ Line 1,238: / Line 2,590: @@
 <tr>
 <td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Checked By</font></td>
-<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">The name of the Employee who validated/conducted the Background Check is displayed here.</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">The name of the Employee who validated/rejected the Background Check is displayed here.</font></td>
 </tr>
 <tr>
-<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Expires On</font></td>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Check Date</font></td>
-<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2"> The date on which the Background Check expires is displayed here.</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2"> The date the Background Check was passed or failed is displayed here.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Background Check Type</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2"> The type of Background Check is displayed here. Users can click on the name and this will open/display the Background Check in a pop-up/lightbox. This needs to be Mapped into the CVCheck APP in the Mapping area.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Expires In</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2"> The number of days until the Background Check expires.</font></td>
 </tr>
 <tr>
@@ Line 1,249: / Line 2,609: @@
 </tr>
 <tr>
-<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Action</font></td>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Supplier</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2"> The organisation or governing body from which the Background Check was sourced is displayed here.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Actions</font></td>
 <td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">
 *<b>Create New</b> - allows the User to create a new Background Check. It is mandatory as part of this step for Users to attach a copy of the Background Check to validate/keep a record of it.
-*<b>Renew</b> - allows the User to renew the Background Check.
+*<b>Edit</b> - allows the User to edit a Background Check. background Checks can't be edited once they are 'Active.'
+*<b>View</b> - allows the User to view the Background Check.
+*<b>Renew</b> - allows the User to renew a Background Check.
 *<b>Validate</b> - allows the User to validate a Background Check.
-*<b>Reject</b> - allows the User to reject a Background Check.
+*<b>Reject</b> - allows the User to Reject/Fail a Background Check.
+*<b>Renew CVCheck</b> - This allow for you to Renew the Membership that belongs to the Education and Qualifications Record. This "Action" is available in the Expiry and Expired Tabs. You do this through the Renewal "Action" against the Education and Qualifications Record. It will create a New Education and Qualification Record with the same data as the previous, but it will allow you to update the Membership Expiry. So you are not checking the Education and Qualifications, you are rechecking/renewing the Membership. When you renew the Check, through CVCheck for Membership it will go to Pending, and the P&C user needs to "Validate" or "Reject" it once the results come back.
 </font></td>
 </tr>
 </table>
 === Compliance Management Widget – Education & Qualifications Folder ===
-This Folder displays all the Education & Qualifications held by Employees and their current status. It also allows Users to create new and/or validate Education/Qualifications for Employees.
+This Folder displays all the Education & Qualifications held by Employees and their current status. It also allows Users to create new and/or validate Education/Qualifications for Employees. For Employees you can run a Membership Check through CVCheck if the CVCheck APP is installed. You do this through the Renewal "Action" against the Education and Qualifications Record. It will create a New Education and Qualification Record with the same data as the previous, but it will allow you to update the Membership Expiry. So you are not checking the Education and Qualifications, you are rechecking/renewing the Membership.
 The types of Education/Qualifications include:
@@ Line 1,268: / Line 2,634: @@
 *Diplomas.
 *Certificates.
 <table border="1" width="100%" cellspacing="0">
@@ Line 1,286: / Line 2,651: @@
 <td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Filter</b></font></td>
 <td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Allows the User to "Filter" Education/Qualification records by Tag or Filter: E.g. Degree, Diploma etc.</b></font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Date/Timeframe Search</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Allows the User to "Filter" Education/Qualification records based on the timeframes in the dropdown menu, which include: one day, one week, two weeks, one month. When active/a date range search parameter/filter is being applied, the looking glass square will be green.</b></font></td>
 </tr>
 <tr>
 <td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Expiring Tab</b></font></td>
-<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Displays all the Education/Qualifications that are expiring within the next three months.</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Displays all the Memberships related to Education & Qualifications that are expiring within the next three months.</b></font></td>
 </tr>
 <tr>
 <td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Expired Tab</b></font></td>
-<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Displays all the Education/Qualifications that have expired and need renewing.</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Displays all the Memberships related to Education & Qualifications that have expired and need renewing.</b></font></td>
 </tr>
 <tr>
 <td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Active Tab</b></font></td>
-<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Displays all the Education/Qualifications that are current (and don’t fall under the other two tabs/categories above).</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Displays all the Education/Qualifications that are current and have been validated.</b></font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Pending Tab</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Displays all the Education/Qualifications records that have been entered into the System and are awaiting validation.</b></font></td>
 </tr>
 <tr>
 <td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>From Applicant Tab</b></font></td>
 <td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Displays all the Education/Qualifications that need to be validated by HR to ensure that all Education/Qualifications nominated by the Applicant during the recruitment process are in fact valid.</b></font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Failed Tab</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Displays all the Education/Qualifications that failed to be validated.</b></font></td>
 </tr>
 <tr>
@@ Line 1,310: / Line 2,687: @@
 <td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Education/Qualification Name</font></td>
 <td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2"> The name of the Education/Qualification is displayed here. Users can click on the name and this will open/display the Education/Qualification in a pop-up/lightbox.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Education/Qualification Institute</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2"> The name of the Institute at which the Education/Qualification was gained is displayed here.</font></td>
 </tr>
 <tr>
@@ Line 1,324: / Line 2,705: @@
 </tr>
 <tr>
-<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Expires On</font></td>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Check Date</font></td>
-<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2"> The date on which the Education/Qualification expires (if it expires) is displayed here.</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2"> The date on which the Education/Qualification was validated is displayed here.</font></td>
 </tr>
 <tr>
-<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Cost</font></td>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Qualification Type</font></td>
-<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2"> The cost (if any) of the Education/Qualification is displayed here.</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">The type of the Education/Qualification is displayed here.</font></td>
 </tr>
 <tr>
-<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Action</font></td>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Previous</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">If there was a previous Education/Qualification, a link to it is displayed here.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Actions</font></td>
 <td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">
-*<b>Create New</b> - allows the User to create a new Education/Qualification record. It is mandatory as part of this step for Users to attach a copy of the Education/Qualification to validate/keep a record of it.
+*<b>Edit</b> - allows the User to edit a Education/Qualification. Education/Qualifications can't be edited once they are 'Active.'
-*<b>Add to Course Waiting List</b> - allows the User to add the Employee to the waiting list for the Course they need to take to update the Education/Qualification.
+*<b>View</b> - allows the User to view the Education/Qualification.
-*<b>Add to Event Waiting List</b> - allows the User to add the Employee to the waiting list for the Event they need to take to update the Education/Qualification.
+*<b>Validate</b> - allows the User to validate a Education/Qualification.
-*<b>Renew</b> - allows the User to renew the Education/Qualification.
+*<b>Reject</b> - allows the User to reject a Education/Qualification.
-*<b>Validate</b> - allows the User to validate an Education/Qualification.
+*<b>Renew CVCheck</b> - This allow for you to Renew the Membership that belongs to the Education and Qualifications Record. This "Action" is available in the Expiry and Expired Tabs. You do this through the Renewal "Action" against the Education and Qualifications Record. It will create a New Education and Qualification Record with the same data as the previous, but it will allow you to update the Membership Expiry. So you are not checking the Education and Qualifications, you are rechecking/renewing the Membership. When you renew the Check, through CVCheck for Membership it will go to Pending, and the P&C user needs to "Validate" or "Reject" it once the results come back.
-*<b>Reject</b> - allows the User to reject an Education/Qualification.
 </font></td>
 </tr>
 </table>
 ==People & Culture – WHS Incident Widget==
@@ Line 1,373: / Line 2,756: @@
 <td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Filter</b></font></td>
 <td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Allows the User to "Filter" WHS Incident records by level of importance: E.g. high, medium, low.</b></font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Date/Timeframe Search</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Allows the User to "Filter" HR Questions based on the timeframes in the dropdown menu, which include: one day, one week, two weeks, one month. When active/a date range search parameter/filter is being applied, the looking glass square will be green.</b></font></td>
 </tr>
 <tr>
@@ Line 1,379: / Line 2,766: @@
 </tr>
 <tr>
-<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Incident Type</font></td>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Employee Name</font></td>
-<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Displays the type of Incident reported.</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Displays the name of the Employee who was injured.</font></td>
 </tr>
 <tr>
@@ Line 1,387: / Line 2,774: @@
 </tr>
 <tr>
-<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Days Open</font></td>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Incident Type</font></td>
-<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Displays the number of days the Incident has been open (if not yet resolved).</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Displays the type of Incident reported.</font></td>
 </tr>
 <tr>
@@ Line 1,400: / Line 2,787: @@
 <td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Date Reported</font></td>
 <td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Displays the number date on which the Incident was reported.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Days Open</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Displays the number of days the Incident has been open (if not yet resolved).</font></td>
 </tr>
 <tr>
@@ Line 1,406: / Line 2,797: @@
 </tr>
 <tr>
-<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Action</font></td>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Attachment</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Displays any attachments related to the Incident.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Actions</font></td>
 <td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">
-*<b>Resolve</b> - allows the User to resolve and close the Incident.
 *<b>View</b> - allows the User to view the Incident.
+*<b>Resolve</b> - allows the User to resolve and close the Incident.
 </font></td>
 </tr>
 </table>
+==People & Culture – HR Questions Widget==
+The HR Questions Widget allows People and Culture users to view, track and manage HR Questions to ensure they are sent to the right person and responded to in a timely manner. People & Culture Users can also create FAQs, which are then available to all Users via the FAQs Folder.
+===HR Questions Widget - Questions Folder===
+Allows People and Culture Users to create and assign Questions to other Employees, or to Reassign Questions that they are not the best placed person to answer.
+<table border="1" width="100%" cellspacing="0">
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Field Name</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Description</b></font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Search</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>This is a free text field that allows Users to filter the list based on specific keywords entered here.</b></font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>+ Create New</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Allows the User to create a new HR Question for an Employee using the [[New-HR-Issues-and-Questions_Wizard|HR Questions Wizard]].</b></font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Active Tab</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Displays all the currently active HR Questions (that have not yet been responded to and Completed).</b></font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Completed Tab</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Displays all the HR Questions that have been responded to and Completed.</b></font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>All Tab</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Displays all the HR Questions - both Active and Completed.</b></font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Reassigned to Me</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Displays all the HR Questions that have been Reassigned to that User. If an HR Question is initially sent to someone who is not the most appropriate person to respond to that Question, the Receiver can Reassign it to someone more appropriate to respond.</b></font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Filter</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Allows the User to "Filter" HR Questions by level of importance: E.g. high, medium, low.</b></font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Date/Timeframe Search</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Allows the User to "Filter" HR Questions based on the timeframes in the dropdown menu, which include: one day, one week, two weeks, one month. When active/a date range search parameter/filter is being applied, the looking glass square will be green.</b></font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Employee Name</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Displays the name of the Employee who submitted the Question.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Ticket Number</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Displays a ticket number for each HR Question submitted, the higher the number, the more recently the Question was submitted.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Question Type</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Displays the type of Question asked. The options are:
+*Company Policy.
+*Training.
+*General Question.
+*Holidays.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Question Details</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Displays a snippet of the Question asked (approximately 15 characters)</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Days Open</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Displays the number of days the Question has been open (without being answered).</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Level of Importance</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Displays the level of importance related to the Incident. The options are:
+*High: Red.
+*Medium: Orange.
+*Low: Blue.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Date Sent</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Displays the date on which the Question was sent.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Attachments</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Displays any attachments associated with the Question.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Actions</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">
+*<b>Create New</b> - allows the User to create a new Question.
+*<b>View</b> - allows the User to view the Question.
+*<b>Reassign</b> - allows the User to Reassign the Question to a more appropriate responder.
+*<b>Start Conversation</b> - allows the User to start a conversation about the Question/Question topic.
+*<b>Respond</b> - allows the User to respond to the Question.
+*<b>Complete</b> - allows the User to complete the Question and close it.
+</font></td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+===People & Culture - HR Questions Widget - FAQs Folder===
+Allows People and Culture Users to create FAQs that are then available as a resource for all Employees.
+<table border="1" width="100%" cellspacing="0">
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Field Name</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Description</b></font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Search</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>This is a free text field that allows Users to filter the list based on specific keywords entered here.</b></font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>+ Create New</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Allows the User to create a new FAQ.</b></font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Active Tab</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Displays all the currently Active FAQs.</b></font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Unpublished Tab</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Displays all the draft/unpublished FAQs.</b></font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Archived Tab</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Displays all the Archived FAQs.</b></font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Category</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Displays the type of the FAQ. The options are:
+*Company Policy.
+*Training.
+*General Question.
+*Holidays.
+</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Details</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Displays a short summary of the FAQ.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Owner</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Displays the Departmental owner of the FAQ. The options are:
+*Company Policy.
+*Training.
+*General Question.
+*Holidays.
+*Customer Service.
+*Environmental.
+*Executive Management.
+*Finance & Admin.
+*Operations.
+*Sales.
+*Sales & Marketing.
+*Information Technology.
+*Human Resources.
+*OH&S.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Created Date</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Displays the date the FAQ was created.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Updated Date</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Displays the date the FAQ was updated (if it has been updated).</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Actions</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">
+*<b>Create New</b> - allows the User to create a new FAQ.
+*<b>View</b> - allows the User to view the FAQ.
+*<b>Edit</b> - allows the User to edit the FAQ.
+*<b>Publish</b> - allows the User to Publish a draft FAQ.
+*<b>Archive</b> - allows the User to Archive an FAQ.
+*<b>Reactivate</b> - allows the User to Reactivate an Archived FAQ.
+</font></td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+==People & Culture - Change Request==
+The Change Request Widget allows Employees the ability to Create New Records and Update Existing Records via a Change Request process, which sends the request through an Authorisation process prior to the Record being Change or Created. Upon Authorisation, the records get created or updated depending on the Request.
+<table border="1" width="100%" cellspacing="0">
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Field Name</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Description</b></font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Create New</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">At the Top Right of the Widget there is a "New Change" option. This can be used to Create a Change Request. Create New you can do a Max of 4 Records at a time (this option will be available if there are no existing records in that Object". Create and Replace you can do this with a Max of 4 Records. Add Additional you can do this with a Max of 4 records at a time.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Search</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This is a free text field that allows Users to filter the list based on specific keywords entered here.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Inprogress</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">This will show Requests that are sent to the Manager for Authorisation.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Authorised</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Shows Authorised Change Requests for Team Members.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2"><b>Rejected</b></font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Shows Rejected Change Requests for Team Members.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Employee</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Which Employee was the Change Request for.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Requested Date</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Date the Change Request was done.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Change Request For</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Which Object / Employee Information the Change Request for for.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Authorizer</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Who was the Change Request Sent to for Authorisation.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Change Date</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">If Authorised, this is that date for when the Change Request will take place.</font></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="206"><font face="Arial" size="2">Actions</font></td>
+<td width="484"><font face="Arial" size="2">Authorise - Forward - Reject. These are options for the P&C Users which are available in the Inprogress Tab. These options are available until the Request has been Actioned. Once Authorised, The "Action", <b>Start Crossboarding</b> will appear for Job and or Salary Changes. If you start Crossboarding, The Crossboarding Wizard will appear. Any change to Salary or Job, will be able to be selected from the Crossboarding Wizard and used to merge into the templates (Contract - Letter) and used in the Crossboarding Pack. You can choose to Crossboard based on a Job Change, Salary Change, or you can choose to include Job and Salary in the same Crossboarding, based on what has been authorised. To Crossboard based on Job, Select the Action Menu and then Start Crossboarding. Make sure you use the Job based Pack which caters for Job Change only. If you want to Start Crossboarding based on Salary only, select Start Crossboarding from the Salary Record. If you want to do both Job and Salary, select the Check Boxes on the left for both and then you will see the “Start Crossboarding” Item appear top right of the Widget. Or Select the Action, Start Crossboarding on either record. Changes made to Job or Salary can be used in this way in relation to Crossboarding Packs. Note: Authorising a Job / Salary Change Request at the same time from two separate Salary Job Changes Requests at Authorisation Stage: If you perform a Change Request for a Job or Salary, upon Authorisation of either the Job or Salary Change Request, you will be able to select the alternate Authorisation to include in that Authorisation, So if you select the Authorise Salary, you can choose to also authorise the relevant Job Change Request at the same time. </font></td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+<br><br>
 [[File:subscribehr_logo.gif]]

People and Culture Dashboard Widgets

Latest revision as of 03:49, 15 October 2024

Contents

People and Culture Dashboard Option

People and Culture Widget - Search Team Member Personal Details

People and Culture Widget - Time Off and Pay

People and Culture - Tasks and Notifications Widget

People & Culture - Company Policies Widget

People & Culture Widget - Company Policies – Incomplete Tab

People & Culture Widget - Company Policies – Completed Tab

People & Culture Widget - Company Policies – No Policies Tab

People & Culture Widget - Announcements and Acknowledgements Widget

People & Culture – Training Widget

People & Culture - Training Widget – Training Analysis Folder

People & Culture - Training Widget – Mandatory Training Folder

People & Culture - Training Widget – Training Records Folder

People & Culture - Training Widget – +Create New Training Record Wizard

People & Culture - Training Widget – +Create New Training Record Wizard - Who Is This Request For?

People & Culture - Training Widget – +Create New Training Record Wizard - Job Training Guide

People & Culture - Training Widget – +Create New Training Record Wizard - Job Training Guide

People & Culture - Training Widget – +Create New Training Record Wizard - Training Record

People & Culture - Training Widget – e-Learning Folder

People & Culture - Training Widget – e-Learning Catalogue Folder

People & Culture - Training Widget – Training Catalogue Folder

People & Culture - Training Widget – Training Events Folder

People & Culture - Training Widget – CPD Folder

People & Culture - Training Widget – Skills Folder

People & Culture - Talent Profile Widget

Talent Profile Summary PDF

People & Culture - Performance Management Widget

How to Navigate to the Performance Management Widget

People & Culture - Performance Management Widget – Review Cycle Wizard for Cycles based Performance Reviews

People & Culture - Performance Management Widget – Review Cycle Wizard for Start Date based Performance Reviews

People & Culture - Performance Management Widget – + Create New Wizard

People & Culture - Performance Management Widget – Goals Tab: + Create Goal Wizard

People & Culture - Performance Management Widget – Skills Tab: + Create Skill Wizard

People & Culture - Performance Management Widget – Catch-Ups Tab: + Create Catch-Up Wizard

People & Culture - Performance Management Widget – Reviews Folder

People & Culture - Performance Management – Advanced Performance Management Reports

People & Culture - Performance Management Widget – Review Cycle Consolidated Reports

People & Culture - Performance Management Widget – Individual Summary Reports

People & Culture - Performance Management Widget – Goals Folder

People & Culture - Performance Management Widget – Catch Ups Folder

People & Culture - Performance Management Widget – Acknowledgements Folder

People & Culture - Performance Management Widget – Skills Folder

People & Culture - Timesheets Management Widget

People & Culture - Time Off Management Widget

People & Culture – HR Surveys Widget

People & Culture – Compliance Management Widget

Compliance Management Widget – Certificates & Licences Folder

Compliance Management Widget – Background Checks Folder

Compliance Management Widget – Education & Qualifications Folder

People & Culture – WHS Incident Widget

People & Culture – HR Questions Widget

HR Questions Widget - Questions Folder

People & Culture - HR Questions Widget - FAQs Folder

People & Culture - Change Request

Navigation menu

Search